Oki ES8453 MFP User Manual Download Page 1

Page: 1 / 1267

MC853/MC873/ES8453 MFP/ES8473 MFP

User’s Manual

2015.0

45992552EE0

Summary of Contents for ES8453 MFP

Page 1: ...MC853 MC873 ES8453 MFP ES8473 MFP User s Manual 2015 09 45992552EE03 ...

Page 2: ...ccessories Unpacking and Installing the Machine Installing Options Installing the Additional Tray Unit s to the Machine Installing the Wireless LAN module Turning the Machine On Setting Up This Machine Connecting This Machine to a Network Connecting via a USB Interface Connecting a Telephone Line Installing a Driver and Software to a Computer Copy Basic Operations of Copy Functions Setting a Docum...

Page 3: ... Document Type Specifying the Scan Resolution Resolution Copying a Document with a Colored Background Clearly Background Removal Erasing Edge Shadows Edge Erase Erasing Shadow Lines Center Erase Erasing Outside of Documents Outside Erase Removing Show Through Show Through Removal Color Settings Adjusting the Contrast Contrast Adjusting Hue for Color Copy Adjusting Saturation Adjusting RGB Advanced...

Page 4: ...g a Duplex Document Duplex Scan Skipping White Pages When Scanning White Page Skip Changing the Document Orientation Direction Scanning Documents of Different Sizes Mixed Size Specifying a File Name Specifying a Color Mode Specifying a File Format Specifying a File Compression Rate Encrypting a PDF File Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Before Using Scan To E mail Using Scan To E mail S...

Page 5: ...d Destination Profile Scanning from a Computer Before Using Remote Scan How to Use Remote Scan Using ActKey Windows About ActKey Installing ActKey Scanning from ActKey Sending Scanned Data by Fax Changing the Setting of Each ActKey Button Using Network Configuration Windows Only Using the TWAIN Driver Windows Using the WIA Driver Windows Only Using Image Capture Mac OS X Descriptions of Screens fo...

Page 6: ...ng Multiple Pages onto One Sheet of Paper Adjusting Color on the Computer Printing Color Data in Grayscale About Color Matching Color Matching Automatic Color Matching Office Color Color Matching Graphic Pro Color Matching No Color Matching Simulating Printing Results for Ink Color Separation Correcting Color Registration Error Manually Correcting Density Manually Make Minor Adjustment for Color R...

Page 7: ...thentication before Printing ID Secure Job Descriptions of Screens for Print About Screens and Functions of Each Printer Driver Windows PCL Printer Driver Windows PS Printer Driver Windows XPS Printer Driver Mac OS X PS Printer Driver Names and Functions of Screen Items for Print Fax Basic Operations of Fax Functions Before Sending and Receiving Faxes Sending a Fax Procedure Setting a Document Spe...

Page 8: ...ecifying a File Compression Rate Compression Rate Checking the Transmission History Setting Scanning for Transmission Scanning a Duplex Document Duplex Scan Specifying a Scan Resolution Resolution Sending a Fax to Multiple Destinations at the Same Time Specifying a Scan Size Scan Size Adjusting the Density Density Scanning a Document with a Colored Background Clearly Background Removal Erasing Edg...

Page 9: ...ode Setting the T F Timer Setting TAD Mode Block Junk Fax Previewing a Received Fax Performing Confidential Communication and Bulletin Board Communication Fcode Communication About Fcode Communication Registering an Fcode Box Deleting a Registered Fcode Box Sending a Fax to a Destination Confidential Box Fcode Transmission Printing a Document That is Received in the Confidential Box of This Machin...

Page 10: ...y For C cyan M magenta Y yellow Toner Cartridge Replacing the Image Drum Replacing the Image Drum and Toner Cartridge at the Same Time Replacing the Belt Unit Replacing the Fuser Unit Replacing the Feed Roller Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Replacing the Feed Roller MP Tray Replacing the Stapler Cartridge Cleaning Each Part of the Machine Cleaning the Surface of the Machine Cleaning the Document Glas...

Page 11: ...or Code is 380 If the Error Code is 381 If the Error Code is 382 383 385 389 If the Error Code is 384 If the Error Code is 390 If the Error Code is 391 392 393 or 394 If a Document Jam Occurs If a Document is Visible in the Paper Path If a Document Jams in the ADF Automatic Document Feeder If the STATUS Button on the Operator Panel Lights Up or Flashes Copy Problems Unable to Copy The Copied Outpu...

Page 12: ...dged The Entire Paper Area is Lightly Stained When Printing on Envelopes or Coated Paper Toner Comes Off When Printed Paper is Rubbed Uneven Gloss Black or White Dots Appear Dirt is Printed The Entire Page is Printed Black Nothing is Printed White Patches Appear The Entire Page is Dirty The Peripheral Area of the Page is Dirty The Printed Image is Skewed Color of the printed image is not what you ...

Page 13: ...r Save Function Setting Power Save Mode Using the Web Page of This Machine from a Computer Using Configuration Tool Windows Only Using the Operator Panel Setting Sleep Mode Using the Web Page of This Machine from a Computer Using Configuration Tool Windows Only Using the Operator Panel About Restrictions in Sleep Mode and Deep Sleep Mode Reducing Power Consumption by Automatically Turning the Mach...

Page 14: ... Panel Fax Numbers Registering a Fax Number from a Computer Registering a Group Number from a Computer Deleting a Registered Fax Number from a Computer Deleting a Registered Group Dial Number from a Computer Importing and Exporting Speed Dials of Destinations Registering a Fax Number from the Operator Panel Registering a Group Number from the Operator Panel Deleting a Registered Fax Number from th...

Page 15: ...ed Printing in the Windows Environment Printing in the Mac OS X Environment Faxing in the Windows Environment Account Management Enabling Account Management Setting a Number of Points to Each Account Creating a Shared Account Setting Paper Points Toner Points Printing When Account Management is Enabled Precautions when Operating Moving Transporting This Machine Moving This Machine Transporting Thi...

Page 16: ...oogle Cloud Print Printing with Google Cloud Print Checking Google Cloud Print Registrations Checking or Changing the Use of Cloud Service Settings Deleting the Registered Information Checking That Deletion is Complete About Importing the CA Licenses of the Proxy Server Network Topics Software Network Settings Connecting to a Wireless LAN Only When the Wireless LAN Module is Mounted Connecting wit...

Page 17: ...ent Data to an E mail Destination or Shared Folder Auto Delivery Limiting by Using an IP Address IP Filtering Limiting by Using a MAC Address MAC Address Filtering E mail Alert Checking the Status of This Machine by Using SNMPv3 Connecting This Machine to the Authentication Network by Using IEEE802 1X Setting by Using PEAP Setting by Using EAP TLS Setting the LDAP Server Setting the Reception Prot...

Page 18: ... Setup Tool Mac OS X Only Using Network Card Setup Mac OS X Print Job Accounting Client Make It More Convenient Print Frequently Used Documents Directly from the Operator Panel Easily Print from USB Memory without Using your Computer Create Your Own Banners Create Your Own Event Posters Create Your Own Saddle bound Booklets Send Paperless Faxes from Your Computer Preview Incoming Faxes via E mail ...

Page 19: ...18 ...

Page 20: ...Before starting For Your Safety Cautions Topics to Safety General Cautions About This Manual 19 ...

Page 21: ...For Your Safety Read the User s Manual this manual for your safety before using the product Cautions Topics to Safety General Cautions 20 ...

Page 22: ...ns Topics to Safety Indicates additional information which if ignored or not followed may result in personal injury or death Indicates additional information which if ignored may result in personal injury 21 ...

Page 23: ...plug regularly and clean the bases of and in between the plug blades If the power plug is left plugged into the outlet for an extended period of time dust adheres on the bases of the plug blades and a short may occur possibly resulting in fire Do not vacuum spilled toner with an electric vacuum cleaner Vacuuming spilled toner with an electric vacuum cleaner may result in ignition due to sparks fro...

Page 24: ...nse with a large amount of water Seek medical advice if necessary Do not disassemble the image drum or toner cartridge or force them open You may inhale the scattered toner or the toner may land on your hands or clothes making them dirty Do not put credit cards USB Memory etc close to the clip tray on the document glass Doing so may damage data NOTE This product is not intended for use in the imme...

Page 25: ...al will not affect the applicability of the information in it Mention of software products manufactured by other companies does not necessarily constitute endorsement by the manufacturer While all reasonable efforts have been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible we make no warranty of any kind expressed or implied as to the accuracy or completeness of the information cont...

Page 26: ...b browser cannot use the cookie function or does not permit it When you start this manual by clicking index html the Active X console is displayed Click Allow blocked content If tables in this manual are not correctly displayed widen the well browser window Screen Composition This section describes the screen composition of this manual How to Use the Table of Contents This section describes how to...

Page 27: ...r mouse over to display See more functions Click to display useful functions Switch four tabs to search for functions 4 Links Moves to the corresponding topic Maintenance Describes how to replace consumables and how to clean this machine Troubleshooting Describes how to solve problems Settiing Items Describes how to set up this machine and register information before using 5 FAQ Open the FAQ web p...

Page 28: ...ic 3 Returns to the top page COPY Displays Using the Copy Functions SCAN Displays Using the Scan Functions PRINT Displays Using the Print Functions FAX Displays Using the Fax Functions 4 SITE MAP Displays the site map of this manual 5 Prints the selected topic Printing a Topic 6 Topic Title Indicates the title of the displayed topic 7 Collapse all Expand all 8 Displays the previous topic 9 Display...

Page 29: ...den the contents area TOC tab The table of contents of the category to which the topic displayed on the right screen belongs is displayed A title with a mark at the beginning has subtopics Click the mark to display the subtopics of the title Also click the mark to close the subtopics Click Expand all to display all the topic titles of the category Click Collapse all to close all the expanded title...

Page 30: ...29 ...

Page 31: ...in the search box at the top of the screen and then click Top page Content page Search results are displayed in a separate screen When entering multiplex words input a space between the words The topics that include all of the entered keywords are searched for Search Options Click search options and add options when searching to narrow searching range Memo AND Search is set by default 2 Click the ...

Page 32: ...the page to display other 10 search results click the page number If 50 or fewer search results are found only page numbers are displayed If 51 or more search results are found the following icons are displayed before and after the page numbers Returns to the first page of the search results Proceeds to the last page of the search results Returns to the previous page of the search results Proceeds...

Page 33: ...re printing for the first time 1 Select Print from of your Web browser If the Web browser menu is not displayed press the F10 key 2 Click Print preview from the drop down list 3 Click Page Setting 4 Select the Print background colors and images check box Printing the Displayed Topic Print the topic displayed on the right screen 1 When a topic is displayed click at the top of the screen 2 Set print...

Page 34: ...hine correctly Be sure to read to ensure that you can operate the machine correctly Indicates information that is useful for using this machine It is recommended to read Indicates a reference topic Read when you need more information Indicates a related topic Read when you need related information Indicates a title within the topic If you click the link the topic is displayed About Symbols This se...

Page 35: ...file name on a computer Indicates the topic title of a link destination Indicate a key on the computer keyboard Indicates how to display the required menu of the machine or computer About Illustrations The illustrations of MC873 are used in this manual as examples The illustrations of the touch panel used in this manual are displayed with the factory default settings Memo The descriptions in this ...

Page 36: ...ssories Unpacking and Installing the Machine Installing Options Turning the Machine On Setting Up This Machine Connecting This Machine to a Network Connecting via a USB Interface Connecting a Telephone Line Installing a Driver and Software to a Computer 35 ...

Page 37: ...nment the operation noise may be louder If the noise bothers you we suggest you to install the machine in the place away from you or in another room Do not install this machine in a location where temperature becomes high or near open flames Do not install this machine in a location where chemical reactions may occur such as a laboratory Do not install this machine near alcohol thinners or other f...

Page 38: ...to ventilate the room Install this machine away from a source that emits strong magnetic fields or noise Install this machine away from a monitor or television Carry this machine by holding both its sides and slightly slanting its rear side down Installation Space Install the machine on a flat surface that is wide enough to accommodate the legs of the machine Allow for enough room around the machi...

Page 39: ...orrectly or supplied consumables may not be applied Main body Four image drums black yellow magenta and cyan Four starter toner cartridges black yellow magenta and cyan For the MC models the starter toner cartridges are installed in the image drums which are installed in the machine before shipment Note The starter toner cartridge is not installed in the ES models Install the toner cartridge that ...

Page 40: ...s or USB cables are not included in the package Prepare the cable that suits your computer separately Packaging and cushioning materials are used when transporting the machine Do not dispose packaging materials as they may be used in the future 39 ...

Page 41: ... or strong light approximately 1 500 lux or more Even under room lighting do not leave the image drum for 5 minutes or more Packaging and cushioning material is required for transporting the machine Do not dispose of it and keep it for future use 1 Remove the machine from the box and then remove cushioning material and the plastic bag from the machine A set of accessories is packed within the cush...

Page 42: ... 3 Take the accessories out 4 Remove the cushioning materials and protection tapes 5 Remove the protection tapes 6 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 7 Remove the desiccant pack and protective sheet attached to the transparent part 41 ...

Page 43: ...ger into the lever B on the right side of the machine andpull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward Note Open the front cover gently If opening rapidly an MP tray may open 10 Press the button C and open the Output Tray 3 42 ...

Page 44: ... the bottom of the image drum 12 Remove the protective sheets from four image drums Place an image drum on a newspaper Remove a tape stuck on a protective sheet and open it Pull out a protective sheet in the direction of the arrow Note Do not turn the blue lever of the toner cartridge 13 Put all four image drums back into the machine 43 ...

Page 45: ...14 Turn the blue lever of the toner cartridge backward until its top aligns on the mark Turn the levers of all 4 toner cartridges 15 Close the output tray 16 Close the front cover 44 ...

Page 46: ...y if the output tray is not closed When the error message that the output tray or front cover is open does not disappear from the operator panel s display screen make sure they are closed securely 17 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 45 ...

Page 47: ...LAN module Note Be sure to turn the machine off and unplug the power cord and all the cables before installing the option Installing the option with the machine turned on may cause the machine and option to malfunction Installing the Additional Tray Unit s to the Machine Installing the Wireless LAN module 46 ...

Page 48: ...ter Base Model Number N35110A Note Be sure to turn the machine off and unplug the power cord and all the cables before installing the additional tray Installing the additional tray with the machine turned on may cause the machine and additional tray to malfunction Available Combinations Machine Cabinet Machine Additional Tray Cabinet Machine Additional Tray Additional Tray Caster Base Machine Addi...

Page 49: ...cables Turning the Machine Off 2 Stack 3 additional trays on the caster base aligning a back side of each tray 3 Screw the additional trays on the caster base 4 Join the additional trays 48 ...

Page 50: ...5 Place the machine on the additional trays gently aligning the back sides of the machine and the additional trays 6 Join the machine and additional trays 7 Lock the casters 49 ...

Page 51: ...ion tools on the left and right sides of the caster base and also two tools on its back side Pull them straight out then turn them 90 counter clockwise until they click 9 Plug the power cord and the unplugged cables 10 Press the power switch for approximately a second 50 ...

Page 52: ...S applies to the following conditions the information about the installed option is automatically obtained not requiring you to set the printer driver If the USB connection or the network connection with Bonjour is used and you install the option to the machine before installing the driver The Windows XPS printer driver is not available with Windows Server 2003 You must register the printer driver...

Page 53: ...ick Get Printer Settings to set the driver automatically Setting Additional Tray s to the Windows XPS Printer Driver 1 Click Start and then select Devices and Printers 2 Right click OKI MC873 and then select OKI MC873 XPS from Printer properties 3 Select the Device Options tab 4 Enter the total number of trays and then click OK 52 ...

Page 54: ...ht click OKI MC873 and then select OKI MC873 PS from Printer properties 3 Select the Device Settings tab 4 Select Get installed options automatically for Installable Options and then click Setup Memo When using a USB connection select the total number of trays for Available Trays in Installable Options 5 Click OK 53 ...

Page 55: ...OS X Printer Driver 1 Select System Preferences from the Apple menu 2 Click Print Scan 3 Select the machine and then click Options Supplies 4 Select the Driver tab 5 Select the total number of trays for Available Tray and then click OK 54 ...

Page 56: ...and then unplug the power cord Note Wait for at least 1 minute after unplugging the power cord and then proceed to the next step 2 Open the connector cover by pressing the knob of the cover 3 Connect the connector of the connection cable to the wireless LAN module and then install the module to the machine 4 Close the connector cover 5 Turn the machine on 6 Press Device Settings AdminSetup User In...

Page 57: ...ower cord into the outlet 3 Check that no documents are set on the document glass or in the ADF and the ADF cover is closed 4 Press the power switch for approximately a second When the machine is turned on the power switch LED lamp is lit When the machine is turned on for the first time after the wireless LAN board is attached the wireless setting screen is displayed 56 ...

Page 58: ...ou select Do not show next time the wireless setting is not performed The wireless setting screen is not displayed any more If you select No the wireless LAN setting is not performed The wireless setting screen is displayed every time you turn the machine on 57 ...

Page 59: ...nformation 1 Press English and proceed to the next screen 2 Press Continue with default settings and proceed to the next screen 3 Check the content displayed on the screen and press Next 4 Press Next and set the date and time 5 Press Next and set the administrator password 58 ...

Page 60: ...ext and set the fax number and sender s information 7 Press Next and set the essential network information 8 Press Next and set the information related to E mail 9 Press Next and print the configuration list 59 ...

Page 61: ...10 Now the machine is set up Here is the procedure to install the software into your computer 60 ...

Page 62: ... same time If using a wireless LAN do not connect a LAN cable to this machine If the machine is used in a wireless network environment the machine does not enter Deep Sleep mode but enters Sleep mode Do not place any electric products that emit weak radio waves such as microwaves or digital cordless telephones close to the machine If there is metal aluminum sash or a reinforced concrete wall betwe...

Page 63: ...ion key manually to connect to the wireless LAN Checking That Connection is Established Correctly This section describes the procedure for checking by using the printer whether a connection to a wireless LAN is properly established Connecting with a LAN Cable If there is no DHCP server on a network you must set the IP address on a computer or machine manually Even if you are instructed to set a un...

Page 64: ...set Network Scale select Device Settings Admin Setup Network Menu Network Setup Network Setting Network Scale Small 1 Prepare a LAN cable and hub Prepare a LAN cable category 5 or higher twist pair straight and hub 2 Turn the machine and computer off Turning the Machine Off 3 Attach the core to the LAN cable Wind the LAN cable in a single loop at 2 to 3 cm from the end of the cable and then attach...

Page 65: ...5 Insert the other end of the LAN cable into the hub 6 Turn the machine on 64 ...

Page 66: ...SB cable USB cables are not included in the package Prepare a USB 2 0 cable separately Memo If you want to connect in USB 2 0 Hi Speed mode use a Hi Speed USB 2 0 USB cable 2 Turn the machine and computer off Turning the Machine Off 3 Insert one end of the USB cable into the USB interface connector on the machine Note Do not insert the USB cable into the network interface connector It may cause a ...

Page 67: ...Note For Windows do not insert the other end of the USB cable into the computer until an instruction is displayed on the screen when the driver installation is in progress 66 ...

Page 68: ...of the machine so that it is not to be loose Note You cannot connect an ISDN line directly To connect use a terminal adaptor TA and connect to the LINE connector of the machine Connecting to the Public Line If Using Only for Faxes Connecting to the Public Line If Connecting a Telephone to the Machine Connecting to the ADSL Environment Connecting the Optical IP telephone Connecting a CS Tuner or Di...

Page 69: ...to the Machine No Name 1 Telephone cable 2 LINE connector 3 Public line analog 4 Telephone connector cover 5 TEL connector 1 Plug one end of the included telephone cable 1 into the LINE connector 2 of the machine and the other end into a public line analog 3 2 Remove the telephone connector cover 4 3 Plug the external telephone cable into the TEL connector 5 of the machine A telephone that is conn...

Page 70: ...s sending or receiving a fax the fax image may be corrupted or a communication error may occur If the incoming call is a voice call the telephone may ring late or stop halfway and if the incoming call is a fax the machine may not be able to receive the fax If you connect a telephone with the fax function disable the fax function disable fax reception before using Memo In the case of direct interco...

Page 71: ...ine Memo If a fax dial fails set Dial Tone Detection to OFF User Install If a fax transmission or reception fails set Super G3 to OFF User Install Connecting the Optical IP telephone No Name 1 Telephone cable 2 LINE connector 3 TEL connector 4 Optical IP telephone corresponding telephone Insert into the telephone cable jack 5 LAN cable 6 Optical Network Unit ONU 7 Optical cable 1 Plug the included...

Page 72: ...lephone cable 2 LINE connector 3 Public line analog 4 TEL connector 5 CS tuner or digital television 1 Plug the included telephone cable 1 that is connected to the public line analog 3 into the LINE connector 2 of the machine 2 Remove the telephone connector cover 3 Plug the telephone cable 1 that is connected to the CS tuner or digital television 5 into the TEL connector 4 of the machine Connecti...

Page 73: ...the machine Memo Home Telephone is a simple switcher for home use which connects multiple telephones with one or two telephone lines enabling you to use extension and door phones Business Phone is a simple switcher which accommodates three or more telephone lines with which many telephones can be shared allowing for extension phones or other usage Connecting as an Extension Telephone No Name 1 Tel...

Page 74: ...connector 2 of the machine and the other end into a control device such as a PBX 4 Memo If you connect to a PBX private branch exchange set the PBX line to ON Fax Setup 73 ...

Page 75: ... of this machine before installing This machine is turned on For network connection this machine is connected to the network via a network cable and required information such as IP address is already set USB connection is disabled by factory default You need to change the USB mode setting before connecting this machine to a computer with a USB cable Select AdminSetup Management Local Interface USB...

Page 76: ...then click Next 7 Select the model name of the machine and then click Next 8 Click Install Optional Software Installation starts Memo The following software is installed PCL6 Printer Driver Scanner Driver ActKey Install other software from Custom Install Installing Software 9 Make sure that the software is successfully installed and then click Complete 75 ...

Page 77: ...tilities see the following Installing Software Note USB connection is disabled by factory default You need to change the USB mode setting before connecting this machine to a computer with a USB cable Select AdminSetup Management Local Interface USB Menu and then change USB Assignment from IPP to Legacy Install the Mac OS X scanner driver 76 ...

Page 78: ...X10 8 10 10 or Installer for OSX10 6 10 7 in accordance to your Mac OS X version 4 Click Continue 5 Click Continue 6 Check that the displayed content and then click Continue 7 Read the license agreement and then click Continue 8 Click Agree 9 Click Install To change the driver installation location click Change Install Location 10 Enter the administrator name and password and then click OK 11 Clic...

Page 79: ... 3 Double click the OKI icon on the desktop 4 Drivers PS Double click Installer for OSX 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation 6 Select System Preferences from the Apple menu 7 Click Print Scan 8 Click 9 Click Default 10 Select the machine and then make sure that OKI MC873 PS is displayed for Use Types of Names Displayed ...

Page 80: ...hen Installable options is displayed click Continue 13 Make sure that the machine is added to Printers and OKI MC873 PS is displayed for Kind Note If OKI MC873 PS is not displayed for Kind correctly click delete the machine from Printers and then newly perform steps 8 to 12 14 Click Open Print Queue 15 Select Print Test Page from the Printers menu 79 ...

Page 81: ...80 ...

Page 82: ...Copy Basic Operations of Copy Functions Useful Functions For a Better Finish Color Settings Advanced Copy Settings Descriptions of Screens for Copy 81 ...

Page 83: ...nctions Setting a Document Loading Paper Copying Cancelling Copying Switching Color Modes Specifying the Number of Copies Specifying the Paper Feed Tray Paper Feed Switching Output Trays Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies Zoom 82 ...

Page 84: ...Setting a Document This chapter describes how to set the document on this machine Setting a Document Copying Different Size Documents Mixed Size 83 ...

Page 85: ...Loading Paper This chapter describes paper that can be loaded in the paper feed sources on the machine Loading Paper Setting Output Tray 84 ...

Page 86: ...witches to the copy top screen 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Set the copy setting if necessary Useful Functions For a Better Finish Color Settings Advanced Copy Settings 4 Press the START button Memo You can ring a tone when copying is complete Adjusting Volume 85 ...

Page 87: ...Cancelling Copying You can cancel copying before a message is displayed to inform you that copying is complete 1 Press the STOP button when scanning the document 86 ...

Page 88: ...y not look as you expected in the following cases In such a case set Color or Mono Here are some examples Documents with extremely small colored part Dark colored documents Pale documents Yellowish documents Documents with colored background Memo You can change the criteria for determining color document and black and white document from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Scanner Adjust Aut...

Page 89: ...88 ...

Page 90: ...a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Enter the number of copies by using the 10 key pad or the 10 key button Memo You can enter the number of copies from 1 to 999 If you enter an incorrect value press the CLEAR button and then enter the correct value 4 Press the START button Topics Sorting Each Set in Page Order Sort 89 ...

Page 91: ...MP Multi Purpose Tray Setting the Paper Feed Tray to Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Paper Feed on the Copy or Basic tab Memo Alternatively you can set this setting from Function Settings 4 Select a tray and then press OK 90 ...

Page 92: ... you can select a paper tray that holds A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Tabloid Letter Letter Legal13 13 5 14 Executive Statement Statement Folio or 8 5 SQ paper To use a different paper size select the paper tray in the Paper Feed setting Using the MP Multi Purpose Tray 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Paper Feed on the Copy or Basic tab Memo...

Page 93: ...5 Load paper in the MP tray Loading Paper 6 Press the START button 7 Check the message and then press Start 8 Press OK 92 ...

Page 94: ...efault setting for output tray can be changed from Device Settings Paper Setup Output Tray Copy When paper remains on the upper output tray the LED blinks Not to blink the LED from Device Settings Admin Setup Management System Setup Set Enable for Near Life LED 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Output Tray on the Basic tab 4 Select an Outp...

Page 95: ...y or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Zoom on the Copy or Basic tab Memo Alternatively you can set this setting from Function Settings 4 Set the zoom rate When using Auto Select Auto and then press OK When selecting a preset zoom rate Select a zoom value and then press OK Available rate settings To set other zoom rate Press Reduce or Enlarge Specify a zo...

Page 96: ...tical and horizontal axes you need to specify the feeding tray You can set the rate in units of 1 If you enter an incorrect value press the CLEAR button and then enter the correct value 5 Press the START button Memo If Paper Feed is set to Auto Zoom is automatically set to 100 To select a different rate set Paper Tray and then set Zoom If Paper Feed is set to Auto the paper tray is automatically s...

Page 97: ...has been changed 96 ...

Page 98: ... Setup Default Settings Copy Setup Copying on Both Sides of Paper Duplex Copy Combining Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N in 1 Changing the Scan Size Scan Size Sorting Each Set in Page Order Sort Enabling Continuous Scan Mode Continuous Scan Copying Different Size Documents Mixed Size Resetting Copy Settings Reset Cancelling a Setting Changing the Document Orientation Direction Interrupting C...

Page 99: ...ection 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass Memo When printing duplex documents on the both sides of paper or on the single side of paper set the documents in the ADF When making duplex copies from simplex documents using the document glass Continuous Scan mode is automatically enabled Follow the on screen instructions Enabling Continuous Scan Mode C...

Page 100: ...elect 2 1 5 Select a binding method 6 To change the document orientation press Change Changing the Document Orientation Direction 7 Press OK 8 Press the START button Topics You can change other copy settings Useful Functions For a Better Finish Color Settings Advanced Copy Settings It is recommended to set a margin when you want to staple or punch holes in duplex copies 99 ...

Page 101: ...ent Duplex copies with the short edge bound Duplex documents Duplex copies with the long edge bound or the short edge bound Set a document in the ADF Duplex documents with the long edge bound Simplex copies Set a document in the ADF Duplex documents with the short edge bound Simplex copies Set a document in the ADF 100 ...

Page 102: ...101 ...

Page 103: ...oom A part of the document may not be copied properly depending on the paper size document size or specified rate If N in 1 is enabled you cannot select Auto for paper feeding source Select the paper tray to be used 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass Memo When using the document glass Continuous Scan mode is automatically enabled Follow the on scre...

Page 104: ...4 Select an N in 1 method 5 Select a layout 6 To change the document orientation press Change Changing the Document Orientation Direction 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press OK 103 ...

Page 105: ...8 Press the START button Printing Methods That Can be Set Two sheets One side of a sheet Four sheets One side of a sheet Vertical Horizontal Eight sheets One side of a sheet Vertical Horizontal 104 ...

Page 106: ... the following document sizes Basis Detectable sizes AB A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Folio Letter Tabloid Letter Letter Legal14 Executive Statement If Legal14 is detected in the Letter series the value between Legal13 Legal13 5 and Legal14 which is specified from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Default Settings Auto detect Scan Size Legal Size is set as Scan Size If the machine cannot dete...

Page 107: ...106 ...

Page 108: ...ss Memo Continuous Scan mode enables you to copy multiple documents at once You can use both the ADF and document glass for copying multiple documents as a single job Enabling Continuous Scan Mode Continuous Scan 3 Check that Sort on the Advanced tab is set to ON Memo Pressing Sort switches between ON and OFF 4 Enter the number of copies 5 Press the START button 107 ...

Page 109: ...per N in 1 Cancelling Copying 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set the first sheet of a document in the ADF or on the document glass Memo When making N in 1 and or duplex copies by using the document glass the Please set next document screen is displayed after scanning the documents even if Continuous Scan is set to OFF 3 Press Continuous Scan on the Advanced tab Continuous Scan is set to ON Memo...

Page 110: ...rom the place you used first 7 Press Start Scan 8 When scanning all sets of the documents is complete press Scan Complete Memo If you press Scan Complete after scanning all the documents with multiple copies 2 or more being set for Copies the remaining number of copies is copied 109 ...

Page 111: ...is enabled Paper Feed cannot be selected The paper tray that matches the document is automatically selected to feed the paper Mixed Size is available only if Zoom is set to 98 Fit to page or 100 You cannot set Edge Erase and Mixed Size at the same time To use multiple sheets of paper press Device Settings and then select Paper Setup Select Tray Copy to enable MP tray When you use the MP tray load ...

Page 112: ... Copy or the COPY button 8 Set a document that is mixed with A4 and A3 sizes in the ADF Loading Paper 9 Press Mixed Size on the Advanced tab Mixed Size is set to ON Memo Pressing Mixed Size switches between ON and OFF 10 Check that the following settings are displayed on the copy start screen Mixed Size ON Paper Feed Auto Zoom 100 111 ...

Page 113: ...ing in the ADF set the documents so that their binding positions align to the top or bottom of the ADF For A3 documents with short edge binding set A4 documents with long edge binding When loading in the ADF set the documents so that their binding positions align to the left or right of the ADF Example 2 For Legal Letter For Legal documents with long edge binding set Letter documents with long edg...

Page 114: ...heir default settings The auto reset time is set to 3 minutes by factory default Memo The auto reset time can be changed from Device Settings Admin Setup Device Management Screen Auto Reset Reset Time Using Reset on the Touch Panel If you press Reset on the copy top screen or each setting screen the settings for your copy job return to their default settings Memo When copying is complete press Res...

Page 115: ...ing of a function with low priority among the ones that are displayed in the message and then set the function you want to use again To cancel the setting of any function reset the setting to the default setting Memo If you have changed the default value from the factory default setting select the changed default value Administrator Setup 1 Select a function to cancel on each tab on the copy top s...

Page 116: ...lt you want 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Direction on the Copy or Basic tab Memo Alternatively you can set this setting from Function Settings 4 Select the document orientation and then press OK Memo If you press Cancel the screen returns to the previous screen without saving the changes 5 Press the START button 115 ...

Page 117: ...116 ...

Page 118: ...everal times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and then press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Copy Setup 5 Press Interrupt and then make sure that Interrupt is set to Enable 6 Press Start while printing you can interrupt the current job to copy a new document 117 ...

Page 119: ...cument Type Specifying the Scan Resolution Resolution Copying a Document with a Colored Background Clearly Background Removal Erasing Edge Shadows Edge Erase Erasing Shadow Lines Center Erase Erasing Outside of Documents Outside Erase Removing Show Through Show Through Removal 118 ...

Page 120: ... button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Density on the Image Settings screen on the Image Settings tab 4 Select density Memo 0 is the standard value To increase the density select 1 2 or 3 darkest To decrease the density select 1 2 or 3 lightest 5 Press the START button 119 ...

Page 121: ...ton 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Document Type on the Image Settings screen on the Image Settings tab 4 Select a document type Memo Text Set when copying a text document Text Photo Set when copying a document having texts and photos The well balanced text and photo are reproduced on an image Photo Set when copying photos and graphic documents Images are reproduced w...

Page 122: ...5 Press the START button 121 ...

Page 123: ...cument in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Resolution on the Image Settings tab 4 Select a resolution Memo Resolution setting is available only when the color mode is set to Auto or Color If you select ExtraFine the reproducibility and gray level of fine lines or small characters will be improved 5 Press the START button 122 ...

Page 124: ...nt In the following cases background color may not be correctly detected and not be eliminated successfully When a custom size document is loaded When a document with the front edge folded is loaded When a document missing the front edge or an oblique document is loaded When a document having a hole near the front edge is loaded When a document is placed without aligning it with the guide on the d...

Page 125: ...nd removal is the standard level To increase a level of the document background removal select 4 5 or 6 To decrease a level of the document background removal select 2 1 or OFF no removal 5 Press the START button 124 ...

Page 126: ...edges on the printed copy This function enables you to erase the black shadow 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Edge Erase on the Image Settings tab 4 Enter a value from 2 to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 inches in Width by using the 10 key pad or by pressing and and then press OK 5 Press the START button 125 ...

Page 127: ...pear in the printouts You can eliminate the shadow lines from the printouts 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document on the document glass 3 Press Center Erase on the Image Settings tab 4 Enter a value from 1 to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 inches in Width by using the 10 key pad or by pressing and and then press OK 5 Press the START button 126 ...

Page 128: ... Auto Background Removal function is disabled When Background Removal is set to Auto Level 3 is applied When copying documents with slashes or of complicated shapes documents and outside documents may not be correctly detected 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document on the document glass Note Do not use the function under a light Shadows may not be erased successfully Widely open the ADF ...

Page 129: ...roblems with the standard level 3 adjust the criteria in the following steps If the outside of the document is not erased increase the value on the criteria If dark parts inside the document are erased decrease the value on the criteria 5 Press the START button 128 ...

Page 130: ...Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Show Thr Rem on the Image Settings screen on the Image Settings tab 4 Select a value Memo Middle is set by default If light color becomes too faint with Middle default value set to Low show through may not be removed completely If show through is not completely removed with Middle default value set to High light color may not be represente...

Page 131: ...130 ...

Page 132: ...Color Settings Adjusting the Contrast Contrast Adjusting Hue for Color Copy Adjusting Saturation Adjusting RGB 131 ...

Page 133: ...on a document are adjusted to make images and texts easier to view and read 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Contrast on the Image Settings screen on the Image Settings tab 4 Select a value 5 Press the START button 132 ...

Page 134: ...olor Copy Red green balance adjustment Reddish Enhance red Greenish Enhance green 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Press Image settings on the Image Settings tab 3 Press Hue 4 Select a value 5 Press the START button 133 ...

Page 135: ...ation Saturation setting Vivid Enhance image sharpness Light Mute color 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Press Image settings on the Image Settings tab 3 Press Saturation 4 Select a value 5 Press the START button 134 ...

Page 136: ...ting RGB Adjust RGB contrast settings 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Press Image settings on the Image Settings tab 3 Press RGB 4 Select a value each for RGB and then press OK 5 Press the START button 135 ...

Page 137: ...s on a Sheet of Paper Repeat Copying Two Page Spread Separately onto Two Sheets Book Copy Adding a Stamp Watermark Copying Both Sides of a Card to One Side ID Card Copy Setting Margins Margin Skipping White Pages When Copying White Page Skip 136 ...

Page 138: ... Zoom To copy a document in your preferred orientation specify the orientation in Direction in advance Changing the Document Orientation Direction A part of the document may not be copied depending on the paper document or zoom rate If the repeat function is enabled the paper tray is automatically set 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass Memo Continu...

Page 139: ...4 Select a repeat method and then press OK Memo If you press Paper Feed you can set a paper feed tray Specifying the Paper Feed Tray Paper Feed 5 Press OK 6 Press the START button 138 ...

Page 140: ...and Letter size documents are available A part of the document may not be copied depending on the paper document or zoom rate 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document on the document glass 3 Press Book Copy on the Advanced tab 4 Select the binding direction of the document to be copied Left side bound Right side bound 5 Select the paper tray in which available paper is loaded Press Tray an...

Page 141: ...140 ...

Page 142: ...edium is used for character strings 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Watermark on the Image Settings tab 4 Press Page Number to set the start page number and printing position 5 Press String to specify the characters and printing position 6 Press Font Size and specify character size 7 Press the START button 141 ...

Page 143: ...machine scans an area half the size of the specified paper If the document is more than half the size of the paper size the excess part is discarded 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Press ID Card Copy on the Advanced tab ID Card Copy is set to ON Memo Pressing ID Card Copy switches between ON and OFF 3 Set your card with the front side down on the document glass 4 Enter the number of copies 5 Pre...

Page 144: ...Memo If you press Scan Complete only the front side is copied without scanning the back side 7 Press Start Scan 143 ...

Page 145: ...fying the left margin is suitable for short edge binding printing Specifying the top margin is suitable for long edge binding printing Note A part of a document may not be copied The specified margin values stay active even after you change the zoom rate To copy a document in your preferred orientation specify the orientation in Direction in advance Changing the Document Orientation Direction Memo...

Page 146: ...in in Left of Front by using the 10 key pad or by pressing and To create a margin on the left side of the output specify a positive value To create a margin on the right side of the output specify a negative value 5 To set the top or bottom margin specify a margin in Top of Front by using the 10 key pad or by pressing and and then press OK To create a margin at the top of the output specify a posi...

Page 147: ...h Sides When you make duplex copies with Margin enabled you must specify the document direction as well as the Back margin Set Direction correctly Changing the Document Orientation Direction 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Duplex Copy on the Copy or Basic tab 4 Set Duplex Copy Copying on Both Sides of Paper Duplex Copy 5 Press Margin on ...

Page 148: ...ocuments with short edge binding Enter values in Top Enter a positive value in Front Enter a negative value in Back For landscape documents with long edge binding Enter values in Top Enter a positive value in Front Enter a negative value in Back For landscape documents with short edge binding Enter values in Left Enter a positive value in Front Enter a negative value in Back 147 ...

Page 149: ...7 Press the START button Memo The margins positions conform to Direction When using the document glass Continuous Scan mode is automatically enabled Follow the on screen instructions 148 ...

Page 150: ...ges are moved up if white pages are omitted If you make duplex copies of two sided documents including blank pages two sides of copies and originals may not correspond Memo You can change the criteria for determining blank pages from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Scanner Adjust White Page Skip Level Scanner Setup 1 Press Copy or the COPY button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the doc...

Page 151: ...Descriptions of Screens for Copy Names and Functions of Screen Items for Copy 150 ...

Page 152: ...a Displays a preview of copy output that will be produced with the current settings 5 Shortcut buttons Displays shortcut buttons for using certain copy functions The screen image shows the factory default setting The setting can be changed by Administrator Setting 6 Function Settings Displays the current settings The setting can be changed for certain functions 7 Device Settings Specifies various ...

Page 153: ... Description 1 Continuous Scan Scans multiple sets of documents as a single copy job 2 Mixed Size Scans multiple documents having the same width but different lengths in the ADF so that they can be copied on their respective paper sizes 3 Book Copy Copies two spread pages of bound documents onto separate sheets of paper 4 Sort Sorts multiple sets of copies in the same page order as the document 5 ...

Page 154: ...g for example a book 4 Center Erase Eliminates shadow lines when scanning a book or magazine 5 Resolution Specifies the resolution to scan a document 6 Outside Erase Eliminates shadow lines outside of document when scanning a book or magazine 7 Watermark Stamps text when copying Function Settings Screen Item Description 1 Setting display area 1 Displays the current settings for displayed items 2 S...

Page 155: ...154 ...

Page 156: ...can Functions Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Sending Scanned Data to a Computer Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Scanning from a Computer Descriptions of Screens for Scan 155 ...

Page 157: ...Basic Operations of Scan Functions Setting a Document Setting to Scan a Document Displaying a Preview Image Cancelling Scanning Other Settings to Scan 156 ...

Page 158: ...Setting a Document This section describes how to set a document Setting a Document Scanning Documents of Different Sizes Mixed Size 157 ...

Page 159: ... E mail Scan To USB Memory and Scan To Shared Folder Specifying a Document Type Specifying a Scan Resolution Adjusting the Density Scanning a Document with a Colored Background Clearly Background Removal Removing Show Through Show Through Removal Adjusting the Contrast Adjusting the Hue Adjusting the Saturation Adjusting RGB Erasing Edge Shadows Edge Erase Erasing Shadow Lines Center Erase 158 ...

Page 160: ...thod 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press Document Type and press a document type Memo Text Set when copying a text document Text Photo Set when copying a document having texts and photos The well balanced text and photo are reproduced on an image Photo Set when copying photos and graphic documents Images are reproduced with the focus on grayscales In Photo mode it takes longer...

Page 161: ...If you select Photo Glossy images may be bright 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 160 ...

Page 162: ...lass 3 Select a scan method Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press Resolution and press a resolution 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 161 ...

Page 163: ...nned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press Density and press a density level Memo 0 is the standard value To increase the density select 1 2 or 3 darkest To decrease the density select 1 2 or 3 lightest 6 Change other settings if necessary and t...

Page 164: ... or an oblique document is loaded When a document having a hole near the front edge is loaded When a document is placed without aligning it with the guide on the document glass If a greater value of the background removal is set fine lines texts or light colors may not be reproduced depending on the document 1 Press Scan or the SCAN button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Sel...

Page 165: ...6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 164 ...

Page 166: ...nned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press Show Thr Rem and press a value Memo Middle is set by default If light color becomes too faint with Middle default value set to Low show through may not be removed completely If show through is not compl...

Page 167: ...166 ...

Page 168: ...DF or on the document glass 3 Select a scan method Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press Contrast and press a value 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button ...

Page 169: ...anned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press Hue and press a value 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 168 ...

Page 170: ...anned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press Saturation and press a value 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 169 ...

Page 171: ...achment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Image Settings on the Image Settings tab 5 Press RGB and press a value for Red Green Blue respectively and then press OK 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 170 ...

Page 172: ...Setup Default Settings Edge Erase ON Width 1 Press Scan or the SCAN button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Select a scan method Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Edge Erase on the Image Settings tab 5 Enter ...

Page 173: ... on the document glass 3 Select a scan method Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Center Erase on the Image Settings tab 5 Enter a value from 1 to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 inches in Width by using the 10 key pad or pressing on the touch pan...

Page 174: ...on the document glass 3 Select a scan method 4 Press Preview on the Advanced tab to set it to ON Memo Pressing Preview switches between ON and OFF 5 Press the START button 6 When preview image is displayed check the scanned image Memo There are three methods to display preview images Displays full page Displays across the width of the screen Displays the scanned page at the same magnification Pres...

Page 175: ...mber you want to display If you set the next document on the ADF or document glass and press button the machine scans the document and displays the scanned document Press button to close the preview screen and cancel sending 7 Press Start Transmission 174 ...

Page 176: ...g while a message is being displayed to inform you that scanning is in progress 1 Press the STOP button Note You cannot cancel when you are performing Scan To Computer or Remote Scan Cancelling Scanning from a Computer When performing Scan To Computer or Remote Scan you can cancel scanning while a message is being displayed to inform you that scanning is in progress 1 Click Cancel in the scanning ...

Page 177: ...nd Scan To Shared Folder Scanning Multiple Documents Continuously Continuous Scan Specifying a Scan Size Scanning a Duplex Document Duplex Scan Skipping White Pages When Scanning White Page Skip Changing the Document Orientation Direction Scanning Documents of Different Sizes Mixed Size Specifying a File Name Specifying a Color Mode Specifying a File Format Specifying a File Compression Rate Encry...

Page 178: ...tachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Continuous Scan on the Advanced tab to set it to ON Memo Pressing Continuous Scan switches between ON and OFF 5 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 6 When the Please set next document screen is display...

Page 179: ...8 When scanning all sets of the documents is complete press Scan Complete 178 ...

Page 180: ... Basic tab Scan Size Scan To USB Memory Scan To USB Memory tab Scan Size Scan To Shared Folder Basic tab Scan Size 5 Select a size Memo Both ADF and the document glass automatically detect the following document sizes Basis Detectable sizes AB A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Folio Letter Tabloid Letter Letter Legal14 Executive Statement If Legal14 is detected in the Letter series the value between Lega...

Page 181: ...180 ...

Page 182: ...chment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Follow the procedure in the table below to press Duplex Scan Scan method Display on the touch panel and operation procedures Scan To E mail Advanced tab Duplex Scan Scan To USB Memory Scan To USB Memory tab Duplex Scan Scan To Shared Folder...

Page 183: ...ice Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Scanner Adjust Blank Page Skip Level Scanner Setup 1 Press Scan or the SCAN button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Select a scan method Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Pres...

Page 184: ...183 ...

Page 185: ...e document glass 3 Select a scan method Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Direction on the Image Settings tab Advanced tab or Basic tab 5 Select a direction 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 184 ...

Page 186: ...y one side scanning For the Scan To Computer Remote Scan and WSD Scan function Mixed Size is not available 1 Press Scan or the SCAN button 2 Set a document in the ADF 3 Select a scan method Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Follow the p...

Page 187: ...he documents so that their binding positions align to the top or bottom of the ADF For A3 documents with short edge binding set A4 documents with long edge binding When loading in the ADF set the documents so that their binding positions align to the left or right of the ADF Example 2 For Legal Letter For Legal documents with long edge binding set Letter documents with long edge binding When loadi...

Page 188: ...Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press File Name on the Advanced tab 5 Enter a file name and then press OK You can enter up to 64 characters 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 187 ...

Page 189: ...ory tab Color Mode Scan To Shared Folder Basic tab Color Mode 5 Select a color mode Memo When Auto Color Grayscale is enabled this machine detects the color of each page automatically Color documents are scanned in full color black and white documents are scanned in grayscale When Auto Color Mono is enabled this machine detects the color of each page automatically Color documents are scanned in fu...

Page 190: ...189 ...

Page 191: ...n the Image Settings tab 5 Press a file format The screen that appears when Auto color Gray is selected is shown as an example 6 Press a file format The available file formats vary depending on the selected color type Color type File format Auto Color Gray Single PDF Multi PDF Single HC PDF Multi HC PDF Multi PDF A Single TIFF Multi TIFF JPEG XPS Auto Color Mono Single PDF Multi PDF Multi PDF A Si...

Page 192: ...TIFF Multi TIFF JPEG XPS Mono Single PDF Multi PDF Multi PDF A Single TIFF Multi TIFF XPS 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 191 ...

Page 193: ... E mail Attachment Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Specify a destination by following the procedure for the selected scan method 4 Press Compression Rate on the Image Settings tab 5 Select a compression rate 6 Select a compression rate 7 Select a color type 8 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 192 ...

Page 194: ...permission password Memo The permission setting items for printing and editing a PDF file vary depending on the encryption level A permission to print a document a permission to extract text and graphic and a permission to change a document are displayed only if you select Enable or Apply Default Password for Permissions Password 1 Press Scan or the SCAN button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on th...

Page 195: ...d cannot be the same as a document open password You can enter up to 32 characters 11 Enter the password again and then press OK 12 Select a permission to print and then press Next 13 Select a permission to extract and then press Next 14 Select a permission to edit and then press Next 15 Check the security setting and then press Yes 16 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START bu...

Page 196: ...Specifying a Destination Address Book or Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination Searching the LDAP Server Setting the Sender s Address Setting the Reply Address Specifying a Subject Registering Body Text Using a Template Saving Transmission Data 195 ...

Page 197: ...s that is used for sending e mails smtp test co jp POP3 server The server address that is used for receiving e mails pop3 test co jp Authentication method Mail transmission server authentication SMTP SMTP user ID The account name of the mail transmission server OKIMC873 SMTP password The password of the mail transmission server okimc873 POP user ID The account name of the mail reception server use...

Page 198: ...tor panel on the machine When registering and editing the server information the content in the setting information sheet is required Set the reception method for the machine to receive e mails If you want to receive and print e mail attachment files that are sent to the machine select POP3 or SMTP to suit your e mail setting environment If you do not want to receive e mails select Disable Note If...

Page 199: ...198 ...

Page 200: ...ination is added to To To add multiple destinations press another one touch button 4 Check the Scan To E mail tab is selected To select Cc or Bcc press To several times 5 Specify a destination Specify a destination in one of the following ways Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book or Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination...

Page 201: ...Other Settings to Scan 7 Press the START button 200 ...

Page 202: ... mail address in the following steps A destination of scanned data Step 5 in Using Scan To E mail A reply destination of a received e mail Step 9 in Setting the Sender s Address 1 Press Manual Input on the Scan To E mail or Basic tab 2 Enter an e mail address You can enter up to 80 characters 3 Press OK 201 ...

Page 203: ... book or group list refer to E mail Address Memo Set an e mail address in the following steps A destination of scanned data Step 5 in Using Scan To E mail A reply destination of a received e mail Step 9 in Setting the Sender s Address 1 Press Address Book or Group List on the Scan To E mail or Basic tab 2 Select the transmission destination or group You can select multiple items 3 When you complet...

Page 204: ...ne touch Button You can select an e mail address registered in the address book with a one touch button To select the speed dial numbers 09 to 40 that are assigned to one touch buttons press or to switch between the screens 203 ...

Page 205: ...on of scanned data Step 5 in Using Scan To E mail A reply destination of a received e mail Step 9 in Setting the Sender s Address 1 Press Tx History on the Scan To E mail or Basic tab 2 Select the destination You can select multiple items 3 When you complete the selection of all the destinations press OK 204 ...

Page 206: ...pecify user names or e mail addresses as search keywords Up to 100 search results are displayed For details on setting the LDAP server refer to Setting the LDAP Server Memo Set an e mail address in the following steps A destination of scanned data Step 5 in Using Scan To E mail A reply destination of a received e mail Step 9 in Setting the Reply Address For Simple Search 1 Press LDAP on the Scan T...

Page 207: ...d 4 Press User name 5 Enter the keyword to search for 6 Press OK 7 Press E mail Address 8 Enter the keyword to search for 9 Press OK 10 Press OK to start searching 11 When the search results are displayed press the destination You can select multiple items 12 When you complete the selection of all the destinations press OK 13 Press Back to return to the start screen 206 ...

Page 208: ... Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press E mail Setup 6 Press From Reply To 7 Press From 8 Enter an e mail address 9 Press OK 10 Press Back until the top screen is displayed 207 ...

Page 209: ...dmin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press E mail Setup 6 Press From Reply To 7 Press Reply To 8 Specify a destination 9 Press Back until the top screen is displayed 208 ...

Page 210: ...Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press E mail Setup 6 Press Template 7 Press Edit Subject 8 Select a number from Subject1 to Subject5 9 Enter a subject You can enter up to 80 characters 10 Press OK 11 Press Back until the top screen is displayed 209 ...

Page 211: ... and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press E mail Setup 6 Press Template 7 Press Edit Body 8 Select a number from Body1 to Body5 9 Enter body texts You can enter up to 256 characters 10 Press OK 11 Press Back until the top screen is displayed 210 ...

Page 212: ...n the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Scan To E mail 4 Press the Advanced tab 5 Press E mail Setup 6 Press Subject or E mail Body 7 Press Select Subject or Select Text 8 Press the subject or body to select 9 Press the Scan To E mail tab to select an entry method 10 Specify a destination 11 Press the START button Topics Setting the Sender s Address 211 ...

Page 213: ...Saving Transmission Data You can save data sent via Scan To E mail etc For details refer to Saving Sent and Received Data Transmission Data Save 212 ...

Page 214: ...via a network or USB interface Scan a document set on the machine by operating from the operator panel Before Using Scan To Computer Before Using WSD Scan Registering a Computer That is Connected Removing Computer Setting to Start ActKey When Using Scan To Computer How to Use Scan To Computer 213 ...

Page 215: ... depending on the OS of your computer and the function to use Install the appropriate software On the Windows computer Scan To Computer function can be used with ActKey or WSD Scan Refer to the following Before Using Scan To Computer with ActKey Windows Before Using Scan To Computer with WSD Scan Windows If you use Mac OS X you can use Image Capture Refer to the following Before Using Scan To Comp...

Page 216: ...ne is installed in the computer the computer is also registered to the machine as a destination computer for WSD Scan Before Using Scan To Computer with Image Capture Mac OS X If you use Mac OS X you can use Image Capture 1 Set the machine for using Scan To Computer Refer to the following Setting for Using Network TWAIN Network Connection 2 Install the Mac OS X scanner driver Installing a Driver a...

Page 217: ...uch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press TWAIN Setup 6 Make sure that Network TWAIN is set to ON Memo Pressing Network TWAIN switches between ON and OFF 7 Press Back until the home screen is displayed 216 ...

Page 218: ...ows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Check the network connection before starting the procedure below Connecting This Machine to a Network Setting to Use WSD Scan To use the Scan To Computer WSD Scan function and the Remote Scan WSD Scan function via the WSD Scan connection follow the procedure below 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times to select Admin Setup 3 Ente...

Page 219: ...a Computer 1 Select Network from the Start menu The devices that are connected to the network are displayed 2 Right click the MC873 icon under Multifunction Devices and then select Install If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed click Yes 3 When a balloon message is displayed to inform you that the installation is complete on the task bar click the balloon to check the details and then...

Page 220: ...to select Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press WSD Scan Setup 6 Press Binding 7 Select a binding position 8 Press Back until the home screen is displayed 219 ...

Page 221: ... Destination 3 Press Register of a registration location To edit a registered group number select Edit 4 Enter a destination in Destination 5 Enter a destination You can enter up to 16 characters 6 Press OK 7 Press Destination Address 8 Enter an IP address host name or computer name You can enter up to 64 characters 9 Press OK 10 Press Port No 11 Enter a port number and then press OK 12 Press Clos...

Page 222: ...g value of the computer s IP address is automatically displayed if multiple network cards are installed in the computer multiple IP addresses are displayed Select the IP address of the network card that is currently used Change the current setting for the port number that is displayed if necessary 5 After all settings are complete click the Register button to register the setting to the machine If...

Page 223: ...elect Application OKIDATA Scanner Network Scanner Setup Tool 2 Select the machine from the Scan Settings dialog box click Register register Name and Host in the Register host address and then click OK 222 ...

Page 224: ...etwork Scan Destination 3 Press Delete of an item to delete 4 Press Yes on the confirmation 5 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Using Network Configuration Windows Only 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata ActKey Tools Network Configuration 2 Right click Show Network Configuration in the task tray 3 Select Properties from the Scanner menu 4 Click the Unregister tab 223 ...

Page 225: ...5 Select the computer name to unregister and then click Unregister 224 ...

Page 226: ...ck Start and then select Devices and Printers 2 Right click OKI MC873 and then Scan properties If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed click Yes 3 Click the Events tab 4 Select an event from Select an event 5 Select Start this program and then select ActKey 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 so that all events are set to ActKey 7 Click OK 225 ...

Page 227: ...ing ActKey Windows You can use ActKey to display the scanned image on an application save the image in a folder or start a fax transmission application Memo If you use ActKey via network start Network Configuration in advance Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata ActKey Tools Network Configuration 1 Press Scan or Scan 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Scan To ...

Page 228: ...ur computer 8 Select the destination 9 Press START ActKey starts automatically and then the scanner driver starts scanning Using WCD Scan Memo To start duplex scanning turn the setting on and then set a document in the ADF The machine cannot scan the both side of the document set on the document glass even if you turn duplex scanning on If you use the scanner application on a computer a document i...

Page 229: ... 1 Press Scan or Scan 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Scan To Computer If Select A Connecting PC does not appear proceed to step 7 4 Press Select A Connecting PC 5 Press From Network or From USB Interface in accordance with the connection method of the machine and computer 6 For the network connection select a destination computer to which the data is sent If the targe...

Page 230: ...9 Press START 229 ...

Page 231: ...B Memory into the USB port Note Insert USB Memory straight into the USB port Inserting USB Memory at a wrong angle may damage the USB port 4 Press Scan To USB Memory 5 Set scan settings if necessary Memo Press Preview on the Advanced tab to preview the scanned image 6 Press the START button 7 When a message is displayed to inform you that you can remove USB Memory from the port remove it 230 ...

Page 232: ...231 ...

Page 233: ...Saving Scanned Data in a Shared Folder Before Using Scan To Shared Folder How to Use Scan To Shared Folder Changing Registered Destination Profile Deleting a Registered Destination Profile 232 ...

Page 234: ...own 3 Close the window 4 Create a folder in which documents are saved on the computer 5 Right click the created folder and then click Properties 6 Click the Sharing tab and then click Advanced Sharing 7 Select the Share this folder check box and then click Permissions 8 Select the Allow check box of Change in Permissions for Everyone and then click OK 9 Click OK Registering a Destination Profile R...

Page 235: ...file Manager install the User Setting plug in You can install the User Setting plug in at the same time as when installing Configuration Tool or install the plug in later Installing Software You must register the machine in Configuration Tool in advance Starting Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Reg...

Page 236: ...FS for Protocol to register a shared folder 9 Enter the path of the shared folder that you set on the computer in Target URL 10 Enter the port number to use in Port No 11 If access privileges are set to the shared folder enter the user name and password in User Name and Password 12 Select Encode Communication and CIFS Character Set if 235 ...

Page 237: ... 1 Start a Web browser 2 Enter the URL http The IP address of this machine in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine 3 Click Administrator Login 4 Enter admin in User Name and the administrator password of the machine in Password and then click OK For Mac OS X enter admin in Name and the administrator passw...

Page 238: ...or Protocol to register a shared folder 11 Enter the path of the shared folder that you set on the computer in Target URL 12 Enter the port number to use in Port Number 13 If access privileges are set to the shared folder enter the user name and password in User Name and Password 14 Select CIFS Character Set and Encode Communication if necessary 15 Set Detail if necessary 237 ...

Page 239: ...ample PC1 share Memo If there is no DNS server in the network you cannot specify the computer with the computer name the transmission destination computer name In such a case use the IP address of the computer to set Example 192 168 0 3 share 7 Press Next 8 If access privileges are set to the shared folder enter the user name and password in User Name and Password Note If domain management is perf...

Page 240: ...For the domain name check with your network administrator 9 Press Next 10 Set other items if necessary 11 Press OK 239 ...

Page 241: ...can To Shared Folder Memo The following procedure uses the factory default setting 1 Press Scan or the SCAN button The touch panel display switches to the scan top screen 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Scan To Shared Folder 4 Press Select Profile If a profile is not displayed check the Scan To Shared Folder settings Before Using Scan To Shared Folder 5 Select a profil...

Page 242: ...is section describes the change and deletion methods that use Configuration Tool on a computer If you click Save to device the changed settings are reflected to this machine Note To use the Profile Manager install the User Setting plug in You can install the User Setting plug in at the same time as when installing Configuration Tool or install the plug in later Installing Software You must registe...

Page 243: ...4 Click Profile Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 6 Click a profile name to change 7 Edit the profile and then click OK 242 ...

Page 244: ...ss of this machine in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine 3 Click Administrator Login 4 Enter admin in User Name and the administrator password of the machine in Password and then click OK For Mac OS X enter admin in Name and the administrator password of the machine in Password and then click Login 5 Cl...

Page 245: ...6 Click List at the top of the screen 7 Click Profile on the left side of the screen 8 Click a profile to change 9 Click Edit 10 Edit the profile if necessary 11 Click Submit 244 ...

Page 246: ... Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Profile 3 Select a number and then press Edit 4 Select an item to change 5 Change the item and then press OK 6 To change multiple items repeat steps 4 to 5 7 Press Back 8 Press OK to register the setting 245 ...

Page 247: ...his section describes the change and deletion methods that use Configuration Tool on a computer If you click Save to device the changed settings are reflected to this machine Note To use the Profile Manager install the User Setting plug in You can install the User Setting plug in at the same time as when installing Configuration Tool or install the plug in later Installing Software You must regist...

Page 248: ...4 Click Profile Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 6 Click a profile name to delete 7 Click Delete Memo To delete all the destinations profiles click Delete all 247 ...

Page 249: ...dress of this machine in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine 3 Click Administrator Login 4 Enter admin in User Name and the administrator password of the machine in Password and then click OK For Mac OS X enter admin in Name and the administrator password of the machine in Password and then click Login 5...

Page 250: ... delete 9 Click Delete 10 Click OK in a dialog box Deleting a Destination Profile from the Operator Panel 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Profile 3 Select a number and then press Delete 4 When a confirmation screen is displayed press Yes Topics Changing Registered Destination Profile 249 ...

Page 251: ...250 ...

Page 252: ...ou to start the scan function of the machine and scan documents from a computer Before Using Remote Scan How to Use Remote Scan Using ActKey Windows Using the TWAIN Driver Windows Using the WIA Driver Windows Only Using Image Capture Mac OS X 251 ...

Page 253: ...mo The required software varies depending on the OS of your computer and the function to use Install the appropriate software On the Windows computer Remote Scan function can be used with ActKey TWAIN Driver WIA Driver or WSD Scan Refer to the following Before Using Remote Scan with ActKey TWAIN Driver or WIA Driver Before Using Remote Scan with WSD Scan If you use Mac OS X you can use Image Captu...

Page 254: ...te Scan Before Using WSD Scan 3 Install this machine as a WSD device to a connected computer For details see Before Using WSD Scan When the machine is installed in the computer the computer is also registered to the machine as a destination computer for WSD Scan Before Using Remote Scan with Image Capture Mac OS X If you use Mac OS X you can use Image Capture 1 Set the machine for using Remote Sca...

Page 255: ...p 6 Check that Network TWAIN is set to ON Memo Pressing Network TWAIN switches between ON and OFF 7 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Selecting a Remote Scan Mode There are three Remote Scan modes Simple Scan Manual Scan and Secure Scan In Simple Scan mode you can start scanning anytime if the machine is in standby status In Manual Scan mode you must turn Remote Scan on the touch panel...

Page 256: ...ss OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press or several times to select PC Scan Mode 6 Select a scan mode and then press OK 7 Press Back until the home screen is displayed 255 ...

Page 257: ...he operation system of your computer and connection method On the Windows computer ActKey TWAIN compatible applications TWAIN Driver WIA compatible applications WIA Driver WSD Scan can be used Using ActKey Windows Using the TWAIN Driver Windows Using the WIA Driver Windows Only If you use Mac OS X you can use Image Capture Using Image Capture Mac OS X Simple Scan Mode In the Simple Scan mode you c...

Page 258: ... into the standby mode for the remote scan Memo To display the remote scan buttons you must set PC Scan Mode to Manual Scan Mode on the touch panel 4 Start a scanning software on the computer 5 Perform the scan operation on the software Using ActKey Windows Using the TWAIN Driver Windows Using the WIA Driver Windows Only Using Image Capture Mac OS X Secure Scan Mode In the Secure Scan mode set the...

Page 259: ...ess From Network or From USB Interface in accordance with the connection method of the machine and computer 5 For the network connection select a computer to be connected and then press OK Memo If the targeted computer is not displayed register the computer to the machine Registering a Computer That is Connected 6 Start a scan program on a computer 7 Start scanning from the program Using ActKey Wi...

Page 260: ...start scanning according to the specified settings just by clicking a button About ActKey Installing ActKey Scanning from ActKey Sending Scanned Data by Fax Changing the Setting of Each ActKey Button Using Network Configuration Windows Only 259 ...

Page 261: ...Key enables you to start scanning according to the specified settings just by clicking a button Memo ActKey does not support Mac OS X When you install ActKey Network Configuration is also installed at the same time 260 ...

Page 262: ... click Yes 3 Select a language read the license agreement and then click Agree 4 Read the environment advice and then click Next 5 Select a model and then click Next 6 Select a connection type and then click Next 7 Click Custom Install 8 Select only the ActKey check box and then click Install 9 Install the software by following the instructions 10 Click Finish 261 ...

Page 263: ...n the last six digits of the MAC address for a network connection and then click OK 3 Click a scan button Scanning starts A scanned image is opened with a selected application saved in a folder or sent with PC FAX according to the scan button you click Memo If you select Application1 or Application2 the application specified by ActKey or Default program in Windows which associates with the file ty...

Page 264: ...200 dpi and the color mode is fixed to black and white To scan using ActKey preparation procedure such as installation of the scanner driver is required Before Using Remote Scan You also need to set the machine in the stand by mode for Remote Scan before starting scanning on the computer How to Use Remote Scan 1 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 2 Click Start and then select All P...

Page 265: ...264 ...

Page 266: ...t ActKey 2 Select Button settings from the Options menu 3 Click a button to set 4 Change the setting if necessary Memo The default save destination is automatically created when ActKey is installed The scanned data is saved in the save destination folder with file name date sequential number 5 Click OK 265 ...

Page 267: ...of the machine or computer is changed when performing a network scan you can change the setting values with this tool When you install ActKey Network Configuration is also installed at the same time When you start a computer Network Configuration is automatically included in the task bar Registering the Machine New Machine to Network Configuration 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata...

Page 268: ... and port number of the machine 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata ActKey Tools Network Configuration 2 Right click Show Network Configuration in the task tray 3 Select the scanner driver and select Edit Scanner from the Scanner menu The setting value that is currently set to the computer is displayed 4 Change to the IP address and port number of the machine Deleting Computer Infor...

Page 269: ...268 ...

Page 270: ...S3 as an example This section describes the procedure when using Remote Scan with a USB connection To scan using TWAIN Driver preparation procedure such as installation of the scanner driver is required Before Using Remote Scan You need to set the machine in the stand by mode for Remote Scan before starting scanning on the computer How to Use Remote Scan Scanning 1 Set a document in the ADF or on ...

Page 271: ...ings in Simple Mode You can adjust how a document is scanned by changing the driver settings The following explains each setting item You can change the settings of five registered buttons 1 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 2 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on the computer 3 Click Import from File and then select the scanner driver of the machine 4 Click Scan 5 Select Simple from Mode ...

Page 272: ...You can adjust how a document is scanned in details 1 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 2 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on the computer 3 Click Import from File and then select the scanner driver of the machine 4 Click Scan 5 Select Advanced from Mode 6 Change the setting if necessary 7 Click Scan to start scanning 271 ...

Page 273: ... Server 2003 To scan using WIA Driver preparation procedure such as installation of the scanner driver is required Before Using Remote Scan You also need to set the machine in the stand by mode for Remote Scan before starting scanning on the computer How to Use Remote Scan Scanning Memo The following procedure uses PaperPort as an example 1 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 2 Star...

Page 274: ...ista 1 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 2 Click Start on a computer and then select All Programs Windows FAX and Scan For Windows 8 right click on the Start screen and then select All Programs Windows FAX and Scan 3 Click New Scan 4 Select OKI Universal WIA and then click OK 5 Set the setting if necessary 6 Click Scan 7 Exit Windows FAX and Scan 273 ...

Page 275: ... or on the document glass 2 Start Image Capture on the computer 3 Select the machine from the list on the left side of the Image Capture screen 4 Click Scan Scanning starts 5 Select Close Image Capture from Image Capture Changing Settings You can adjust how a document is scanned by changing the driver settings The following explains each setting item If you display detailed information you can adj...

Page 276: ...5 Change the setting if necessary 6 Click Scan 275 ...

Page 277: ...specified you can press Display all to edit add or delete a destination 2 Shortcut buttons Displays shortcut buttons for using certain scan functions The screen image shows the factory default setting The setting can be changed by Administrator Setting 3 One touch buttons Displays destinations assigned to one touch buttons Press a button to add a destination 4 Function Settings Displays the curren...

Page 278: ... the scan size to scan a document 8 Register to Job Macro Registers current settings to Job Macro 9 Displays Help topics Advanced Tab Item Description 1 Duplex Scan Specifies duplex scanning Set this function when scanning both sides of a document 2 Direction Specifies the orientation of images 3 Mixed Size Scans documents of different sizes 4 E mail Setup Specifies an e mail address as a reply de...

Page 279: ...ly when the file format is set to PDF or HC PDF 4 Compression Rate Specifies a compression level for the scanned file 5 Edge Erase Eliminates a black shadow that may appear around the edges on the scanned file when scanning for example a book 6 Center Erase Eliminates shadow lines when scanning a book or magazine Function Settings Destination Tab Add edit or delete a destination to which a documen...

Page 280: ...p topics Scan To USB Memory Screen Scan To USB Memory Tab Item Description 1 Color Mode Specifies color mode to scan a document 2 Scan Size Specifies the scan size according to the size of the document 3 Duplex Scan Specifies duplex scanning Set this function when scanning both sides of a document 4 Register to Job Macro Registers current settings to Job Macro 5 Function Settings Displays the curr...

Page 281: ... specified the file will be named according to the factory default setting 2 Continuous Scan Scans multiple documents as a single job 3 Preview Specifies whether to preview scanned images 4 White Page Skip Skips blank pages when scanning Image Settings Tab Item Description 1 Image Settings Specifies the following image settings Density Document Type Resolution Background Removal Contrast Hue Satur...

Page 282: ...y appear around the edges on the scanned file when scanning for example a book 6 Center Erase Eliminates shadow lines when scanning a book or magazine Function Settings File Name Tab Edit a file name of a scanned document Function Settings Scan Setting Tab Item Description 1 Setting display area 1 Displays the current settings for displayed items 2 Setting display area 2 Displays a list of setting...

Page 283: ...destination 4 Function Settings Displays the current settings The setting can be changed for certain functions 5 Displays Help topics Basic Tab Item Description 1 Color Mode Specifies color mode to scan a document 2 Scan Size Specifies the scan size to scan a document 3 Duplex Scan Specifies duplex scanning Set this function when scanning both sides of a document 4 Direction Specifies the orientat...

Page 284: ...ngs Density Document Type Resolution Background Removal Contrast Hue Saturation and RGB 2 File Format Specifies a file format for the scanned file 3 Encrypted PDF Creates an encrypted password protected scanned file This function is available only when the file format is set to PDF or HC PDF 4 Compression Rate Specifies a compression level for the scanned file 5 Edge Erase Eliminates a black shado...

Page 285: ... Description 1 Setting display area 1 Displays the current settings for displayed items 2 Setting display area 2 Displays a list of settings that are not set by items displayed in setting display area 1 284 ...

Page 286: ...ine Basic Operations of Print Functions Printing on Various Types of Paper Printing with Various Settings from a Computer Saving Paper Saving Toner Adjusting Color on the Computer For a Better Finish Useful Functions Printing Confidential Document Descriptions of Screens for Print 285 ...

Page 287: ...Basic Operations of Print Functions Loading Paper Printing from a Computer Windows Printing from a Computer Mac OS X Cancelling a Print Job 286 ...

Page 288: ...Loading Paper This chapter describes paper that can be loaded in the paper trays of this machine Loading Paper Printing on Envelopes Setting Output Tray 287 ...

Page 289: ...or Windows PS Printer Driver For Windows XPS Printer Driver For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the printer driver 4 Click Preferences 5 Select a paper size from Size on the Setup tab 6 Select a paper tray from Source 7 Select a paper type from Type 8 Select a paper weight option from Weight 288 ...

Page 290: ...Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the PS printer driver 4 Click Preferences 5 Select the paper tray from Paper Source on the Paper Quality tab 6 Click Advanced 7 Select a paper weight option from Media Weight and then click OK 289 ...

Page 291: ...es screen 9 Click Print on the Print screen For Windows XPS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the printer driver 4 Click Preferences 5 Select a paper size from Size on the Setup tab 290 ...

Page 292: ...6 Select a paper tray from Source 7 Select a paper type from Type 8 Select a paper weight option from Weight 9 Click OK 10 Click Print on the Print Screen 291 ...

Page 293: ...ze from Paper Size 5 Select the paper tray for All Pages From on the Paper Feed panel Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 6 Select a paper weight ...

Page 294: ...7 Click Print 293 ...

Page 295: ... without changes If the operator panel indicates that printing is in progress for a long time delete the print job from the computer 1 Press the STATUS button The touch panel display switches to the status screen 2 Press the Device Information tab 3 Press Job List 4 Select the job you want to delete and press Delete 5 Press Yes on the confirmation screen The print data is deleted 294 ...

Page 296: ...Printing on Various Types of Paper Printing on Envelopes Printing on Labels Printing on Long Paper Printing on Custom Size Paper 295 ...

Page 297: ... gluing on the long edge Monarch Com 10 DL C5 load them with the flap folded so that the flap is on the left side when fed Duplex printing is not available for envelopes Loading Envelopes When printing on envelopes change the paper size setting and use the MP tray and rear output tray 1 Load envelopes in the MP tray Com 10 DL C5 C4 2 Open the rear output tray 3 Press Device Settings on the touch p...

Page 298: ...5 Select Multi Purpose Tray from Source 6 Select Landscape from Orientation 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen Memo For the Windows XPS printer driver follow the steps for the Windows PCL printer driver to print For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Page Setup from the File menu 3 Select the envelope size from Size Lan...

Page 299: ... Orientation Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 4 Select Multi Purpose Tray for All Pages From on the Paper Feed panel 5 Change other settings if...

Page 300: ...ilable for labels Loading Labels When printing on labels change the paper type and paper size setting and use the MP tray and rear output tray 1 Load labels in the MP tray 2 Open the rear output tray 3 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 4 Press Paper Setup 5 Press MP Tray 6 Press Paper Size 7 Press A4 or Letter 8 Press Media Type 9 Press Labels 10 Press Back until the home screen is displaye...

Page 301: ...etup tab to print For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Page Setup from the File menu 3 Select A4 or Letter from Size Portrait or Landscape from Orientation and then click OK 4 Select Print from the File menu 5 Click Preferences 6 Select Multi Purpose Tray from Paper Source on the Paper Quality tab 7 Click OK 8 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print For M...

Page 302: ...t the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 4 Select Multi Purpose Tray for All Pages From on the Paper Feed panel 5 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 301 ...

Page 303: ...ions If the paper length exceeds 356 mm the print quality may not be guaranteed even if the paper is used under the recommended conditions Loading Long Paper When printing on long paper change the paper type setting and use the MP tray and rear output tray 1 Load paper in the MP tray 2 Open the rear output tray 3 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 4 Press Paper Setup 5 Press MP Tray 6 Press ...

Page 304: ...s and Printers and create a new paper size in the Forms tab for Print server proterties on the top bar in the window And then select the paper size created in the Print server proterties dialog box from Paper size on the Settings tab For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Click Start and then select Devices and Printers 2 Right click the OKI MC873 icon and then select Printing Preferences OKI MC873 PS 3 ...

Page 305: ...th and Height 7 Click OK 8 Select the registered paper size from Paper Size Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 9 Select Multi Purpose Tray for Al...

Page 306: ...rint quality cannot be guaranteed If paper is so long that it exceeds the paper supports of the MP tray support the paper with your hands It is not recommended to use a paper width of less than 100 mm 3 9 inches because paper jams may result About available paper sizes for each tray and for duplex printing Loading Paper The auto tray switch function is set to ON by factory default When a tray runs...

Page 307: ... icon and then select Printing Preferences OKI MC873 PCL6 3 Click Paper Feed Options on the Setup tab 4 Click Custom Size 5 Enter a name of the new size in Name 6 Enter values in Width and Length 7 Click Add to save the custom paper size to the list and then click OK You can save up to 32 custom sizes 8 Click OK until the Printing Preferences dialog box is closed 9 Open a file 10 Select Print from...

Page 308: ...out tab 4 Click Paper Size and then select PostScript Custom Page Size from the drop down list 5 Click Edit Custom Page Size 6 Enter values in Width and Length and then click OK Note You cannot set Offsets Relative to Paper Feed Direction 7 Click OK until the print setting dialog box is closed 8 Open a file 9 Select the paper size for the registered paper 10 Change other settings if necessary and ...

Page 309: ...7 Click OK 8 Select the paper size created from Paper Size 9 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop dow...

Page 310: ...Only the Cover from a Different Tray Making a Booklet Dividing a Document to Print on Some Sheets for Making a Poster Adding Semi transparent Text Watermarks Overlaying Forms or Logos Overlay Outputting a Document to a File Instead of Printing on Paper Storing Frequently printed Documents in the Printer Printing E mail Attachment Files 309 ...

Page 311: ... Options 6 Select the Use MP tray as manual feed check box and then click OK 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen 9 When a message is displayed on the touch panel load paper in the MP tray and then press Start If the message is not displayed press Print When printing a multiple page document the same message is displayed every time you print one ...

Page 312: ...every time you print one page For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select Multi Purpose Tray for All Pages From on the Paper Feed panel Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 cl...

Page 313: ...the MP tray and press Start If the message is not displayed press Print When printing a multiple page document the same message is displayed every time you print one page 312 ...

Page 314: ...ze to edit from Size on the Setup tab 5 Select the Resize document to fit printer page check box and then select a paper size to print 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen Memo For the Windows XPS printer driver follow the steps for the Windows PCL printer driver and select Paper Feed Options in Media in the Setup tab and then click Conversion Fo...

Page 315: ...7 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the Scale to fit paper size check box on the Paper Handling panel 4 Select a paper size to use from Destination Paper Size 5 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 314 ...

Page 316: ... Options on the Setup tab 5 Select the Use different source for first page check box and then click OK 6 Select a paper tray from Source and then click OK Select a paper type from Type and media weight from Weight if necessary 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen Memo For the Windows XPS printer driver follow the steps for the Windows PCL printer...

Page 317: ...ed from the panel menu 4 Select First Page From and then select a tray to feed the first page 5 Select a tray to feed the remaining pages from Remaining From 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 316 ...

Page 318: ...s and then set booklet printing settings if necessary Signature Specify a unit of pages to be bound 2 pages Print two pages on one page Right to Left Print a booklet that is opened from the right Bind Margin Set a margin 6 Click OK 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen Memo To make an A5 booklet by using A4 paper select A4 from Size on the Setup t...

Page 319: ...Click Advanced 7 Click Booklet Binding Edge and then set margins Memo To make a right fold booklet a booklet with its binding on the right side when the first page is facing up select On Right Edge To make an A5 booklet by using A4 paper select A4 from Paper Size 8 Press OK until the print setting dialog box is closed 9 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 10 Click Print on the Pri...

Page 320: ... Print from the File menu 3 Click Preference 4 Click Poster Print from Finishing Mode on the Setup tab 5 Click Options 6 Set values to Enlarge Add Registration Marks and Add Overlap if necessary and then click OK To make an A3 poster using two sheets of A4 paper select A4 for the paper size and the select 2 for Zoom 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print ...

Page 321: ...320 ...

Page 322: ...e clear the Background check box For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Extend tab 5 Click Watermarks 6 Click New 7 Specify the text size and angle and then click OK 8 Click OK 9 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 10 Click Print on the Print screen Memo For the Windows XPS printer driver follow th...

Page 323: ...lick New 6 Enter text that is printed as a watermark in Text in Watermarks 7 Set Font Size or other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Check that the watermark to print is selected and then click OK 9 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 10 Click Print on the Print screen 322 ...

Page 324: ...r or on Mac OS X Memo In advance you can create a form and then register it in this machine Registering Forms Form Overlay For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Extend tab 5 Click Overlays 6 Select the Print Using Active Overlays check box 7 Click Define Overlays 8 Enter a name of the overlay in Overlay Name 9 Ent...

Page 325: ...ng Preferences OKI MC873 PS 3 Click Overlays on the Job Options tab 4 Select User Overlay from the drop down list and then click New 5 Enter the form name that you registered with the Storage Manager plug in for Configuration Tool in Form Name and then click Add 6 Enter a name of the overlay in Overlay Name 7 Select the pages of the document on which to print the overlay from Print on Pages Memo T...

Page 326: ...11 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 12 Open the file to print 13 Select Print from the File menu 14 Click Print on the Print screen 325 ...

Page 327: ...the OKI MC873 icon and then select Printer properties OKI MC873 Select a driver type to use 3 Select the Ports tab 4 Select FILE from the port list and then click OK 5 Open a file 6 Select Print from the File menu 7 Click Print 8 Enter the name of a file and then click OK For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click PDF in the print dialog box and then select a f...

Page 328: ...327 ...

Page 329: ... print job is not executed This function is not available with the Windows XPS printer driver or on Mac OS X Storing from a Computer in This Machine Windows PCL Only 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Job Options tab 5 Select Store for Re print 6 Enter a job name in Job Name and a password in Job Password 7 If you select the Request Job Name...

Page 330: ... if necessary and then click OK 10 Click Print on the Print screen The print job is only sent to the printer and it is not printed yet Printing the Stored Document from This Machine 1 Press Print or the PRINT button The touch panel display switches to the print top screen 2 Press Stored Job 3 Enter the password and then press OK A job searching starts Memo The password is the one you specified on ...

Page 331: ...330 ...

Page 332: ... destinations for printouts of attachment files from E mail I Fax of Output Tray Only for MC873 Series Setting Output Tray You can forward attachment file of received E mail Forwarding Received Document Data to an E mail Destination or Shared Folder Auto Delivery Setting a POP Server Memo If the POP server does not support SSL encryption you may not receive e mails correctly 1 Open the Web page of...

Page 333: ...il server set the DNS server in the TCP IP setting 7 Click Submit Setting an SMTP Server 1 Open the Web page of this machine How to log in to the Web page Log In as the Administrator 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Network E mail Receive Settings 5 Select SMTP and then click To STEP2 6 Follow the on screen instructions to set detailed settings 7 Click Submit 332 ...

Page 334: ...Saving Paper Saving Toner Printing on Both Sides of Paper Duplex Printing Saving Toner Combining Multiple Pages onto One Sheet of Paper 333 ...

Page 335: ... for the following media weight 64 to 220g m2 17 to 58 lb Do not use media weight other than the above because paper jams may occur Note This function may not be available for some applications Memo When printing on custom size paper duplex printing is available for the following width and length ranges Width 128 to 297 mm 5 0 to 11 7 inches Length 182 to 431 8 mm 7 2 to 17 inches For Windows PCL ...

Page 336: ...f necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X 1 Close the rear output tray 2 Open the file to print 3 Select Print from the File menu 4 Select Long Edge binding or Short Edge binding from Two Sided on the Layout panel Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the ...

Page 337: ...336 ...

Page 338: ...f using this function only Normal 600x600 or Fast 600x600 can be specified as the print quality Memo The density of the image that is printed with this function may vary depending on the printed document For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Setup tab 5 Select the amount of toner to save from Toner saving 6 Change...

Page 339: ... save from Toner Saving 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select Print Options from the panel menu 4 Select the amount of toner to save from Toner Saving in the Quality2 tab 5 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 338 ...

Page 340: ...nter Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the number of pages to print on each sheet at Finishing Mode on the Setup tab 5 Click Options 6 Set each setting at Page Borders Page layout and Bind Margin and then click OK 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen Memo For the Windows XPS printer dri...

Page 341: ...lect Print from the File menu 3 Select the number of pages to print on each sheet from Pages per Sheet on the Layout panel Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer dr...

Page 342: ...Matching Office Color Color Matching Graphic Pro Color Matching No Color Matching Simulating Printing Results for Ink Color Separation Correcting Color Registration Error Manually Correcting Density Manually Make Minor Adjustment for Color Registration Adjusting Color Balance Density Adjusting Color with Software 341 ...

Page 343: ...enta and yellow toners are empty For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences or Properties 4 Select the Color tab and select Greyscale 5 Click OK Memo Set grayscale printing on the Job Options tab Selecting Greyscale on the printer driver enables you to print a color document in grayscale even when the cyan magenta and yellow toners ...

Page 344: ...lor from the panel menu 4 Select Grayscale 5 Click Print Memo Selecting Grayscale on the printer driver enables you to print a color document in grayscale even when the cyan magenta and yellow toners are empty 343 ...

Page 345: ... documents color to keep it consistent between input and output devices There are two color matching functions Office Color and Graphic Pro Color User Settings if you use an XPS driver If you use Mac OS X you can also use ColorSync function to do color matching 344 ...

Page 346: ... For Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Click Detail in the Setup tab and select Automatic and then click OK For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Select the Color tab and select Automatic and then click OK ...

Page 347: ...k Print Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 346 ...

Page 348: ... For Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Click Detail in the Setup tab and select Office Color and then click OK For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Select the Color tab and select Office Color and then cli...

Page 349: ...en click Print Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 348 ...

Page 350: ...river For Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Click Detail in the Setup tab and select Graphic Pro and then click OK For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Select the Color tab and select Graphic Pro and then ...

Page 351: ...350 ...

Page 352: ...ferences or Properties 4 Click Detail in the Setup tab and select No Color Matching and then click OK For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Select Color tab and select No Color Matching and then click OK Memo For the Windows XPS printer driver follow the steps for the Windows PS printer driver and select Colo...

Page 353: ...4 Select No Color Matching for Color and then click Print 352 ...

Page 354: ...1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Click Detail in the Setup tab and select Graphic Pro 5 Select Printer Simulation 6 Select an ink feature you want to simulate from Simulation Target Profile on Input Profile and click OK For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or ...

Page 355: ...Select Graphic Pro 5 Click Options to select Printer Simulation 6 Select an ink feature you want to simulate from Simulation Target Profile Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If no print options but two menu options are displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclos...

Page 356: ...k on Preferences or Properties 4 Select the Color tab and select Advanced 5 Select the color you want to separate from Print Color Separations and then click OK For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the Print Options panel 4 Select Print Color Separations in the Quality 2 tab and click Print Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog bo...

Page 357: ...356 ...

Page 358: ...ust color registration from the operation panel if necessary 1 Press Device Setting 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Print Setup 5 Press Color Menu 6 Press Adjust Registration 7 Press Yes 357 ...

Page 359: ...358 ...

Page 360: ...st color registration from the operation panel if necessary 1 Press Device Setting 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Print Setup 5 Press Color Menu 6 Press Adjust Density 7 Press Yes 359 ...

Page 361: ...r registration for cyan To adjust other colors perform in the same procedure 1 Press Device Settings 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Print Setup 5 Press Color Menu 6 Press CMY Reg Fine Adj 7 Press Cyan Reg F...

Page 362: ...imes and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Print Setup 5 Press Color Menu 6 Press Color Tuning Print Pattern and Yes to print color adjustment pattern 7 Press Cyan Tuning 8 The sliders for Highlight Mid Tone and Dark are displayed Select ...

Page 363: ...362 ...

Page 364: ...Adjusting Color with Software Adjusting Color with PS Gamma Adjuster Utility 363 ...

Page 365: ...tter Finish Enhancing Photos Printing with a Specified Resolution Emphasizing Fine Lines Specifying the Font to Use Changing Black Finish Eliminating White Gap Between Text and Background Overprinting Black 364 ...

Page 366: ...S printer drivers or on Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences or Properties 4 Select the Job Options tab 5 Select the Photo Enhance check box 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen 365 ...

Page 367: ...ows Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Job Options tab 5 Select a print quality level from Quality 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the Print Options panel 4 Select a desired value from Quali...

Page 368: ...367 ...

Page 369: ...s function is not available with the Windows XPS printer driver For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Job Options tab 5 Click Advanced 6 Select Adjust ultra fine lines and select On for Settings and then click OK 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen For Windows P...

Page 370: ...ttings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select Quality1 from tabs 4 Check the Adjust ultra fine lines check box in the Quality 1 tab 5 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 369 ...

Page 371: ... available for some applications For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Extend tab 5 Click Fonts 6 Select the Font Substitution check box in TrueType Font Output Type 7 Specify the printer font to use instead of TrueType fonts in Font Substitution Table 8 Click OK 9 Change other settings if necessary and then click...

Page 372: ...e other settings if necessary and then click OK 12 Click Print on the Print screen Print Using the Fonts of Computer You can print your documents by using TrueType fonts in a computer to reproduce the same font appearance as on the screen Note This function is not available with the Windows XPS printer driver or on Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print fro...

Page 373: ...essary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Click Advanced on the Layout tab 5 Click TrueType Font and then select Download as Softfont 6 Click OK 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen 372 ...

Page 374: ...k text or graphics If you use the Office Color function you can also select the auto If Automatic is selected the suitable method is selected automatically to print out the document For Windows PCL Printer Driver For Windows PS Printer Driver For Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Click Detail in...

Page 375: ... file to print 2 From the File menu select Print 3 Select Color from the panel menu 4 Select Office Color or Graphic Pro and then click Options 5 Select the method to create black from Black Finish 6 Click on OK Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If no print options but two menu options are...

Page 376: ...For Windows PS Printer Driver For Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 On the Job Options tab Select Advanced 5 Set Overprint Black to On For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Preferences or Properties 4 Select the Color tab and select A...

Page 377: ...print check box in the Quality 1 tab Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 376 ...

Page 378: ...cally for the Specified Paper Switching to Another Paper Feed Tray Automatically When a Tray Runs Out Of Paper Selecting Output Tray Changing the Default Settings with a Printer Driver Saving Frequently Used Settings in the Printer Driver to Use Storing Print Data in This Machine before Printing Printing without Opening a PDF File PDF Print Direct Printing Data in USB Memory 377 ...

Page 379: ...Select the Job Options tab 5 Select the number of print copies from Copies and then select the Collate check box 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen Memo For the Windows XPS printer driver follow the steps for the Windows PCL printer driver and set Copies and Collate in the Job Options tab For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2...

Page 380: ...pies in Copies Deselect the Collate pages check box in the Paper Handling tab 4 Select Print Options on the panel menu and then click Collate check box in the Paper tab Memo Printing is performed without using the printer s Memory when Paper Handling is selected on the panel menu and the Collate pages check box is selected 5 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 379 ...

Page 381: ...output tray For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select Front to Back or Back to Front from Page Order on the Layout tab 5 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 6 Click Print on the Print screen Memo If Page Order is not displayed select Start Devices and Printers right click the OKI MC873 icon select Printer ...

Page 382: ...4 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 381 ...

Page 383: ...r Windows Printer Driver For Mac OS X For Windows Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preference 4 For PCL printer driver select the Job Options tab for PS XPS printer driver select the Job Options tab 5 Enter the number of print copies in Copies and then select the Collate check box 6 Select the Rotate Sort check box 7 Click Print on the Print screen ...

Page 384: ...in the Paper tab 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click Print 383 ...

Page 385: ...equence setting Memo Be sure to set the paper size and weight for paper cassettes and the MP tray on the display screen Loading Paper Setting the MP Tray Set the MP tray as a target of the auto tray selection 1 Press Device Settings on the home screen 2 Press Paper Setup 3 Press MP Tray 4 Press MP Tray Usage 5 Press Normal Tray Memo MP Tray Usage is set to Do Not Use by factory default 6 Press Bac...

Page 386: ...indows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select Automatically Select from Paper Source on the Paper Quality tab 5 Click OK 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select Auto Select from All Pages From on the Pap...

Page 387: ...tray switching function with the printer driver Note Be sure to set the same values paper size media type media weight for each tray used for the auto tray switch function Available paper sizes vary depending on the tray Loading Paper Setting Trays for the Auto Tray Switching 1 Press Device Settings on the home screen 2 Press Paper Setup 3 Check that Auto Tray Switch is set to ON Memo Pressing Aut...

Page 388: ...ns in the Setup tab For Windows PS Printer Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Click Advanced on the Layout tab 5 Click Tray Switch and then select ON 6 Click OK 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select Print Options fr...

Page 389: ...388 ...

Page 390: ...een For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the Print Options panel Memo If setting details are not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 10 click Show Details at the bottom of the dialog box If the print option is not displayed in the print dialog box for Mac OS X 10 6 8 click the disclosure triangle next to the Printer drop down list 4...

Page 391: ...click the OKI MC873 icon and then select Printing Preferences OKI MC873 Select a driver type to use 3 Set the printing settings to use as the driver s default settings 4 Click OK For Mac OS X 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select Show Presets from Presets 4 Clear the Reset Presets Menu to Default Settings After Printing check box 5 Click OK 6 Select a preset that is u...

Page 392: ...inters 2 Right click the OKI MC873 icon and then select Printing preferences OKI MC873 Select a driver type to use 3 Set the printing settings to save 4 Click Save in Driver Setting on the Setup tab 5 Enter a name to save the settings and then click OK If you select the Include media settings check box the paper setting on the Setup tab is also saved 6 Click OK to close the print setup dialog box ...

Page 393: ...click OK Printing with Registered Settings Note This function is not available with the Windows PS printer driver For Windows PCL Driver 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select a setting to use from Driver Setting on the Setup tab 5 Click OK 6 Click Print on the Print screen Memo For the Windows XPS printer driver follow the steps for the Windows PCL...

Page 394: ...4 Click Print 393 ...

Page 395: ...emory of this machine a message is displayed to inform you that the file system is full and the print job is not executed This function is not available with the Windows XPS printer driver or on Mac OS X For Windows PCL Printer Driver 1 Open the file to open 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Job Options tab 5 Click Advanced 6 Select Job Spool and select On for Sett...

Page 396: ...5 Click Advanced 6 Check the Job Spool check box and then click OK 7 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Print on the Print screen 395 ...

Page 397: ...s in the Devices and Printers folder Select a driver type to use 2 Right click a PDF file to print and then select PDF Print Direct 3 Select a printer to use To set the user authentication function with the selected printer driver select User Auth from the Printer Setting menu 4 To print an encrypted file select the Setting Password check box and then enter the password If the same password is to ...

Page 398: ...4 Drag the file you want to print to the driver icon 397 ...

Page 399: ...ot supported Encrypted PDF files are not supported Memo The following file systems are supported FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 Supported file formats PDF v1 7 JPEG PDF TIFF v6 baseline XPS PRN PS PCL XPS Up to 32 GB USB Memory is supported Up to 100 files in supported file formats that are saved in USB Memory are displayed in the file list If 100 or more files are saved in USB Memory the file list is not disp...

Page 400: ...printing settings if necessary 7 Press the START button 8 When a message is displayed to inform you that you can remove USB Memory from the port remove it Cancelling a Print Job You can cancel a print job from USB Memory by pressing the STOP button You can cancel a print job until a message is displayed to inform you that printing is complete Note 399 ...

Page 401: ...the screen returns to the print start screen Specifying the Paper Feed Tray Paper Feed Tray Note When printing a PRN file the paper tray specification follows the driver settings at the time of file creation 1 Insert USB Memory into the USB port 2 Press Print or the PRINT button 3 Press Print From USB Memory 4 Press Select Print File 400 ...

Page 402: ...th Sides of Paper Duplex Printing You can select 1 sided simplex or 2 sided duplex printing When performing duplex printing you can select a binding position Note When printing a PRN file the duplex printing settings follow the driver settings at the time of file creation About long edge binding and short edge binding Copying on Both Sides of Paper Duplex Copy 1 Insert USB Memory into the USB port...

Page 403: ...2 Press Print or the PRINT button 3 Press Print From USB Memory 4 Press Select Print File 5 Select the folder that has the file you want to print 6 Press Long Edge Bind or Short Edge Bind 402 ...

Page 404: ...page size of a file to print is larger or smaller than the valid printing area the page size is automatically adjusted to fit the paper size Note When printing a PRN file this setting does not work Memo This function is set to ON by the factory default setting 1 Insert USB Memory into the USB port 2 Press Print or the PRINT button 3 Press Print From USB Memory 403 ...

Page 405: ...t the folder that has the file you want to print 6 Press Fit to select ON for fitting Memo Set Fit to OFF when you do not need to fit page 7 Press the START button Switching Output Trays Only For MC873 Series Switches output trays 404 ...

Page 406: ... always output to the rear output tray For a PRN file the output tray setting depends on the driver setting when the file is created 1 Insert USB Memory into the USB port 2 Press Print or the PRINT button 3 Press Print From USB Memory 4 Press Select Print File 5 Select the folder that has the file you want to print 405 ...

Page 407: ...utput tray 7 Press the START button Specifying the Number of Copies Number of Copies 1 Insert USB Memory into the USB port 2 Press Print or the PRINT button 3 Press Print From USB Memory 4 Press Select Print File 406 ...

Page 408: ...correct value press the CLEAR button and then enter the correct value If you press the CLEAR button the value returns to the original setting value 7 Press the START button Printing with Specified Color Mode You can select color or monochrome when printing Note This setting in not available when printing a PRN file 1 Insert USB Memory into the USB port 407 ...

Page 409: ...Press Print or the PRINT button 3 Press Print From USB Memory 4 Press Select Print File 5 Select the folder that has the file you want to print 6 Press Color Mode 7 Select Color or Mono 8 Press START 408 ...

Page 410: ...409 ...

Page 411: ... Setting a Password to the Print Data Authentication Print Setting a Password and Encrypting the Print Data Encrypted Authentication Print Encrypting Printing Data and Requiring User Authentication before Printing ID Secure Job 410 ...

Page 412: ...file to open 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Click Preferences 4 Select the Job Options tab 5 Select Secure Print from Job Type 6 Enter a job name in Job Name and a password in Job Password If you select the Request Job Name for each printer job check box a prompt is displayed to ask the job name when you send the print job to this machine 7 Click OK 8 Change other settings if necessary and th...

Page 413: ... name in Job Name and a password in Personal ID Number PIN If you select the Request Job Name for each printer job check box a prompt is displayed to ask the job name when you send the print job to this machine 7 Click OK 8 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 9 Click Print on the Print screen The print job is only sent to the machine and it is not printed yet Note If you forget yo...

Page 414: ...nction is not available with the Windows XPS printer driver or on Mac OS X You cannot use this function with the poster printing function and the booklet printing function with the Windows PCL printer driver if you share this machine via the print server When you use this function clear the Give Priority to the host release check box Storing Print Data in This Machine before Printing Setting the P...

Page 415: ...matically deleted Printing an Encrypted Password protected Document from This Machine Print an encrypted and password protected print job saved in the internal Memory of this machine 1 Press Print or the PRINT button 2 Press Encrypted Job 3 When printing enter the password that you set on the computer and then press OK 4 Press Print To cancel the print job select Delete All the encrypted jobs with...

Page 416: ...tion is only available with the Windows PCL printer driver If you share this machine via network using a print server you cannot use this function with the poster printing function or the booklet printing function When you use this function clear the Give Priority to the host release check box Storing Print Data in This Machine before Printing Setting the ID Secure Job Setting on a Computer Window...

Page 417: ... computer You can use any types of authentications User name Password PIN IC card 2 Press Print or Print 3 Press ID Secure Print If you log in with the administrator rights select whether to display ID secured jobs for all users at first If you select Yes all ID secured jobs saved in the machine are displayed If you select No only your own ID secured jobs are displayed 4 When ID secured jobs are l...

Page 418: ...Descriptions of Screens for Print About Screens and Functions of Each Printer Driver Names and Functions of Screen Items for Print 417 ...

Page 419: ... Functions of Each Printer Driver This section describes about screens and functions of each printer driver Windows PCL Printer Driver Windows XPS Printer Driver Windows PS Printer Driver Mac OS X PS Printer Driver 418 ...

Page 420: ...ther settings 5 2 Sided Printing Duplex Specifies this setting when you want to perform duplex printing 6 Orientation Specifies the printing direction 7 Color Setting Switches between color printing and monochrome printing 8 Toner saving Decreases the print density to save toner 9 About Displays the version of the printer driver 10 Default Resets the settings on the tab to their default settings J...

Page 421: ...ettings 7 Default Resets the settings on the tab to their default settings Extend Tab Item Description 1 Watermarks Specifies when you want to use stamp print 2 Overlays Specifies when you want to use overlay print 3 Fonts Specifies TrueType fonts and printer fonts 4 User Authentication Specifies the user authentication 420 ...

Page 422: ...this setting when you want to perform duplex printing 3 Page Order Specifies a page order to print 4 Page Format Specifies the number of pages that is printed on a sheet of paper and booklet printing 5 Preview Displays a preview image of the printed result 6 Advanced Allows you to set detailed settings for print quality and a paper size Paper Quality Tab Item Description 1 Tray Selection Changes t...

Page 423: ...elect the Collate check box multiple documents are printed in units of copies 3 Output Tray Specifies output destination of printouts 4 Fit to Page If you select the Resize document to fit printer page check box a document is printed on paper of a different size from that of the document 5 Watermark Specifies when you want to use stamp print 6 Overlays Specifies when you want to use overlay print ...

Page 424: ... the color adjustment for color printing 2 Toner Saving Saves toner when printing 3 Advanced Sets some other printing settings 4 Color Swatch Starts Color Swatch Utility 5 Default Resets the settings on the tab to their default settings 423 ...

Page 425: ...ecifies the multi page printing booklet printing and poster printing 3 Orientation Specifies the printing direction 4 2 Sided Printing Duplex Specifies when you want to use 2 Sided Printing 5 Driver Settings Saves your settings 6 Preview Displays a preview image of the printed result 7 About Displays the version of the printer driver 8 Default Resets the settings on the tab to their default settin...

Page 426: ... other settings to print 5 Scale Specifies the enlargement reduction rate for printing 6 Output Tray Specifies output destination of printouts 7 Advanced Displays the Advanced screen 8 Watermarks Specifies when you want to use stamp print 9 Default Resets the settings on the tab to their default settings Color Tab Item Description 1 Color Mode Specifies the color printing method 2 Default Resets t...

Page 427: ...426 ...

Page 428: ...layout that is applied when printing multiple pages on a sheet of paper 3 Border Specifies a type of a boundary 4 Two Sided Specifies when performing duplex printing 5 Reverse page orientation Reverses the direction of a page to print by selecting this check box 6 Flip horizontally Flips left and right to print by selecting this check box Color Matching Panel Item Description 1 ColorSync Specifies...

Page 429: ...this check box 5 Destination Paper Size Selects the output paper size when the Scale to fit paper size check box is selected 6 Scale down only Only reduces a document to fit the output paper size by selecting this check box Paper Feed Panel Item Description 1 All Pages From Specifies the paper feed tray If you specify Auto Select a tray is automatically selected 2 First Page From Select this setti...

Page 430: ...anel Item Description 1 Grayscale Specifies to use monochrome printing 2 Color Specifies alignment to color mode when printing in color Print Options Panel Item Description 1 Print Options Specifies alignment to the items that have been set such as print quality paper type etc 2 Items Setup Specifies the setup items conforming to the print setup tab User Authentication Panel 429 ...

Page 431: ...check box if you set user authentication when printing 2 User Name The user name for user authentication 3 Password The password for user authentication Supply Levels Panel Item Description 1 Consumables Displays the remaining amount of consumables 430 ...

Page 432: ...otected and encrypted document stored in the machine ID Secure Print Print encrypted documents secured based on the information saved in the machine This button is not available if the access control is set to Disable 6 Print From USB Memory Prints a print data stored in USB Memory directly 7 Google Cloud Print Prints a print data received from Google Cloud Print manually 8 Offline Switches this m...

Page 433: ...age size to fit the selected paper 6 Color Mode Specifies color mode to copy a document 7 Register to Job Macro Registers current settings to Job Macro 8 Output Tray Specifies the output tray 9 Select Print file Select files to print 10 Copies Specifies the number of copies to make 11 Reset Returns the settings for the current copy job to their default settings 12 Device Settings Specifies various...

Page 434: ... Scanning for Transmission Settings for Transmission Setting for Receptions Performing Confidential Communication and Bulletin Board Communication Fcode Communication Useful Functions Sending Fax from a Computer Sending Data to the Fax Server Descriptions of Screens for Fax 433 ...

Page 435: ...re Setting a Document Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History Deleting a Specified Destination Displaying a Preview Image Cancelling a Fax Transmission Receiving a Fax Checking the Communication Status Transmission and Reception History 434 ...

Page 436: ...Before Sending and Receiving Faxes Prepare for sending and receiving faxes Connecting a Telephone Line 435 ...

Page 437: ...Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 5 Change settings if necessary Memo If you press the START button without changing anything the following factory default settings are applied for scanning and sending a document Scan Size Auto Resolution Normal Density 0 You can change the default setti...

Page 438: ...uments Continuously with the ADF Continuous Scan ADF Scanning a Duplex Document Duplex Scan Specifying a Scan Resolution Resolution Setting Scanning for Transmission Erasing Edge Shadows When Sending Edge Erase Memo Enable Preview on the Advanced tab to preview the image to send 6 Press the START button 437 ...

Page 439: ...t 60 to 120 g m2 16 to 32 lb Document glass Scannable size A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Tabloid Letter Letter Legal 13 13 5 14 Executive Statement Statement Folio Document thickness Up to 20 mm Memo Duplex scan is not available for A5 A6 B5 Statement Note For documents on which adhesives ink or correction fluid is used make sure that they have completely dried before setting About Documents That Can...

Page 440: ...that has sharp protrusions Symbols Indicating Document Orientation This symbol indicates that the document is placed in the vertical orientation from the front of this machine For the ADF place the document in such a way as to feed the long edge first This symbol indicates that the document is placed in the horizontal orientation from the front of this machine For the ADF place the document in suc...

Page 441: ...e automatically detects the following document sizes Basis Detectable sizes AB A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Folio Letter Tabloid Letter Letter Legal14 Executive Statement If Legal14 is detected in the Letter series the value between Legal13 Legal13 5 and Legal14 which is specified from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Default Settings Auto detect Scan Size Legal Size is set as Scan Size Set...

Page 442: ...tive Statement If Legal14 is detected in the Letter series the value between Legal13 Legal13 5 and Legal14 which is specified from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Default Settings Auto detect Scan Size Legal Size is set as Scan Size Note When the document is set on the document glass the document size is detected after the document glass cover is closed Be sure to close the document glas...

Page 443: ...the following functions Prefix and Flash Enter each sign by pressing its sign displayed on the fax number entry screen Hyphen Inserts a hyphen to the entered fax number Prefix Inserts a prefix number that is registered in advance N is inserted when entering Adding a Prefix Prefix Flash Orders your PBX Private Branch Exchange to connect you with PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network F is entered w...

Page 444: ...tone dialing if MF Tone DP Pulse is set to Pulse T is inserted when entering Asterisk Sends to the telephone line if MF Tone DP Pulse is set to Tone is inserted when entering Topics Sending a Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other methods Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 443 ...

Page 445: ...You can enter up to 32 groups 1 Press Speed Dial or Group List on the Fax or Basic tab 2 Press a destination or group The check mark on the left side of the destination or group turns on You can select multiple destinations 3 When you complete the selection of all the destinations press OK Topics Sending a Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other methods Specifying a Destination Direct Entr...

Page 446: ...tep 4 in Sending a Fax Procedure To select the one touch button 09 to 40 that are assigned to one touch buttons press or to switch between the screens Topics Sending a Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other methods Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 445 ...

Page 447: ...Bulletin Board Communication Fcode Communication Memo Specify a destination in step 4 in Sending a Fax Procedure 1 Press Redial on the Fax tab 2 Press a destination The check mark on the left side of the destination turns on You can select multiple destinations 3 When you complete the selection of all the destinations press OK Topics Sending a Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other method...

Page 448: ... Sending a Fax Procedure 1 Press Display All on the Fax tab 2 Press Delete of a destination to delete 3 When you complete the selection of all the destinations to delete press Back If you have deleted all the destinations the screen automatically returns to the start screen 447 ...

Page 449: ...cannot be displayed 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Fax 4 Specify a destination 5 Press Preview in the Advanced tab to set to ON Memo Pressing Preview switches ON and OFF When sending a fax Sending a Fax Procedure When sending an Internet fax Sending an Internet Fax Procedure When sending data to the file server Basic Procedur...

Page 450: ... to scroll the preview image When scanning multiple pages of documents use the navigation button to switch between the pages Displays the previous page Displays the next page Displays any page Press this button and enter page number you want to display If you set the next document on the ADF or document glass and press the button the machine scans the document and displays the scanned document Pre...

Page 451: ...is in progress 1 Press the STOP button Cancelling a Reserved Transmission You can cancel a reserved transmission job Note If you select broadcast the broadcast job is cancelled 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Press Fax 3 Press the Fax Job View Cancel tab 4 Press Delete of a job to cancel Memo A fax that is being sent is displayed on the top of the list 5 Press Yes on a confirmation sc...

Page 452: ...Receiving a Fax This section describes how to check the received fax Printing Received Fax Images Printing a Received Fax Paper Size Priority 451 ...

Page 453: ...d image differs from that of loaded paper the image is automatically rotated before printing Paper Size Priority Received images usually printed on the same size of paper as that of the sender s If the same size paper is not loaded on this machine alternative paper is selected in the following priority order Memo Check the priority of the paper size Paper Size Priority Threshold Threshold means th...

Page 454: ...dard size When the excessive length is within the range of the threshold Reduced to fit on the page Original size The excess is cut off When the excessive length is larger than the threshold Original size The excess is printed on the next page Original size The excess is printed on the next page 453 ...

Page 455: ...13 Legal13 5 Legal14 Statement Statement If Device Settings Admin Setup Management System Setup Default Paper Size is set to A4 see AB series If set to Letter see Letter series If a received fax is larger than a specified paper size the fax is reduced discarded or printed onto multiple sheets of paper depending on the reception print settings Setting a Print Method for When a Received Image Exceed...

Page 456: ... If You Cannot Print a Received Fax Even if the machine cannot print received faxes due to a lack of paper or paper jams the machine can receive data of up to 400 sheets However this amount varies depending on the remaining Memory space or document content If the machine cannot print received faxes due to a lack of paper or paper jams refer to the following items to solve a problem If the problem ...

Page 457: ...Paper Size Priority The received faxes are printed according to the paper size priority in the table below Document size on the sender s machine Paper Size Priority 456 ...

Page 458: ...ab 4 Check the job content Checking the Transmission History and Reception History You can check the transmission history and reception history Note The reception history that is displayed on the panel shows receptions with Fcode polling only Performing Confidential Communication and Bulletin Board Communication Fcode Communication 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Press Fax 3 Press Red...

Page 459: ...458 ...

Page 460: ...ying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server Checking Deleting or Changing a Specified Destination Setting Scanning for Transmission Checking the Transmission History 459 ...

Page 461: ...n the Memory of this machine You can specify only e mail addresses for the destination Memo You can set the following document sizes Any document that contains different paper sizes cannot be used Document sizes that can be set in the ADF A3 A4 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 Tabloid Letter Letter Legal13 13 5 14 Executive Statement or Folio Document sizes that can be set on the document glass A3 A4 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5...

Page 462: ...stination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 6 Set scan settings if necessary Memo If you press START without changing anything the following factory default settings are applied for scanning and sending a document Scan Size Auto Resolution Normal Density 0 Scanning Multiple Documents Continuously Continuous Scan Adjusting the Densit...

Page 463: ...7 Press START 462 ...

Page 464: ...ngs in advance Before Using Scan To E mail If you want to forward an Internet Fax you can use the auto delivery function Forwarding Received Document Data to an E mail Destination or Shared Folder Auto Delivery Memo You can switch output destinations for printouts of attachment files from E mail I Fax of Output Tray Setting Output Tray 463 ...

Page 465: ...dress can be entered by pressing Destination To 2 Enter an e mail address You can enter up to 80 characters Entering Characters 3 Press OK Topics Sending an Internet Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other methods Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 464 ...

Page 466: ...x Procedure You can register up to 1000 destinations in the address book You can register up to 32 groups 1 Press Address Book or Group List on the Internet Fax or Basic tab 2 Select the transmission destination or group You can select multiple items 3 When you complete the selection of all the destinations press OK Topics Sending an Internet Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other methods...

Page 467: ...466 ...

Page 468: ...ernet Fax Procedure To select the speed dial numbers 09 to 40 that are assigned to one touch buttons press or to switch between the screens Topics Sending an Internet Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other methods Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 467 ...

Page 469: ...on in step 5 in Sending an Internet Fax Procedure 1 Press Tx History on the Internet Fax or Basic tab 2 Select the destination and then press OK You can select multiple items Topics Sending an Internet Fax Procedure Specifying a destination in other methods Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a ...

Page 470: ...ed keywords or any of the keywords You can specify user names or e mail addresses as search keywords Up to 100 search results are displayed For details on setting the LDAP server refer to Setting the LDAP Server Memo Specify a destination in step 5 in Sending an Internet Fax Procedure For Simple Search 1 Press LDAP on the Internet Fax or Basic tab 2 Press Simple Search 3 Enter a keyword to search ...

Page 471: ...rch Method 4 Select OR or AND 5 Press User Name 6 Enter the keyword to search for Entering Characters 7 Press OK 8 Press E mail Address 9 Enter the keyword to search for 10 Press OK 11 Press OK to start searching 12 When the search results are displayed press the destination 13 When you complete the selection of all the destinations press OK 14 Press Back to return to the start screen Topics Sendi...

Page 472: ...Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History 471 ...

Page 473: ...anging the Destination Type Checking a Destination 1 Press Display all on the Internet Fax tab 2 Press and hold on the destination to check Press Edit to change the destination if necessary Deleting a Destination 1 Press Display all on the Internet Fax tab 2 Press Delete on the destination to delete 472 ...

Page 474: ...Changing the Destination Type 1 Press Display all on the Internet Fax tab 2 Press To to change a destination type 473 ...

Page 475: ...file name Scanning a duplex document duplex scan Scanning Multiple Documents Continuously Continuous Scan Adjusting the Density Density Specifying a Scan Resolution Resolution Specifying a Scan Size Scan Size Scanning a Document with a Colored Background Clearly Background Removal Setting a Reply Destination Editing an E mail Specifying a File Name File Name Scanning a Duplex Document Duplex Scan ...

Page 476: ...to ON Memo Pressing Continuous Scan switches between ON and OFF 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Press the START button to start scanning the first document 8 When Please set next document is dis...

Page 477: ...alue To increase the density select 1 2 or 3 darkest To decrease the density select 1 2 or 3 lightest 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START ...

Page 478: ...477 ...

Page 479: ... a resolution Memo If you select Photo it takes long to scan a document 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change o...

Page 480: ...xecutive Statement If Legal14 is detected in the Letter series the value between Legal13 Legal13 5 and Legal14 which is specified from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Default Settings Auto detect Scan Size Legal Size is set as Scan Size If the machine cannot detect document size with the Scan Size setting is set to Auto the scanning size selection screen appears when the start button is ...

Page 481: ...7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending an Internet Fax Procedure 480 ...

Page 482: ...om size document is loaded When a document with the front edge folded is loaded When a document missing the front edge or an oblique document is loaded When a document having a hole near the front edge is loaded When a document is placed without aligning it with the guide on the document glass 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press I...

Page 483: ...ation Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending an Internet Fax Procedure 482 ...

Page 484: ...dress Book Group List Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings...

Page 485: ...Body on the Advanced tab 8 Press Select Text 9 Select a text If you select Manual Input in step 8 enter a text and then press OK Memo When directly entering you can enter up to 256 characters 10 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifyi...

Page 486: ...Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending an Internet Fax Procedure 485 ...

Page 487: ...cters Memo If you do not specify a file name the factory default setting name is used 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics Yo...

Page 488: ...ing You can specify Long Edge Bind or Short Edge Bind 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for ...

Page 489: ... 5 Select a compression rate 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Address Book Group List Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History Specifying a Destination LDAP Server 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting...

Page 490: ... Transmission History You can check the transmission history 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Press Internet Fax 3 Press Tx History on the Internet Fax or Basic tab 4 Check the transmission history 489 ...

Page 491: ...g a Document with a Colored Background Clearly Background Removal Erasing Edge Shadows When Sending Edge Erase Disclosing a Sender Name Originator to the Recipient Changing the Sender Name That is Printed on Faxes Printing Transmission Results Automatically Transmit Conf Report Registering the Sender Name Originator Changing the Standard Originator Name Adding a Prefix Prefix Setting the Number of...

Page 492: ...ab 5 Select a setting You can specify Long Edge Bind or Short Edge Bind 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for fax transm...

Page 493: ... resolution Memo Extra Fine may not be available depending on the receiver s machine If you select Fine Extra Fine or Photo it takes long to scan a document 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 7 Change other settings if necessar...

Page 494: ...493 ...

Page 495: ... a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 5 Repeat step 4 to enter all the destinations 6 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button 7 Check the destinations set from the list screen and press the START button Memo You can delete specified addresses Memo To cancel operation press RESET on the touch panel A group list is useful when you want to broadcast Regi...

Page 496: ...egal14 Executive Statement If Legal14 is detected in the Letter series the value between Legal13 Legal13 5 and Legal14 which is specified from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Default Settings Auto detect Scan Size Legal Size is set as Scan Size If the machine cannot detect document size with the Scan Size setting is set to Auto the scanning size selection screen appears when the start bu...

Page 497: ...nsmission History and Reception History 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending a Fax Procedure 496 ...

Page 498: ...the standard value To increase the density select 1 2 or 3 darkest To decrease the density select 1 2 or 3 lightest 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics ...

Page 499: ...ly When a custom size document is loaded When a document with the front edge folded is loaded When a document missing the front edge or an oblique document is loaded When a document having a hole near the front edge is loaded When a document is placed without aligning it with the guide on the document glass 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document g...

Page 500: ...ing a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending a Fax Procedure 499 ...

Page 501: ...ument in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Fax 4 Press Edge Erase on the Advanced tab 5 Enter a value from 2 to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 inches in Width by using the 10 key pad or pressing on the touch panel and then press OK Memo If you press Cancel the screen returns to the previous screen without saving the changes 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destin...

Page 502: ...You can change other copy settings Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending a Fax Procedure 501 ...

Page 503: ... Check that TTI is set to ON Memo Pressing TTI switches between ON and OFF You can change the sender name originator to use Easy Setup 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the S...

Page 504: ...Sending a Fax Procedure 503 ...

Page 505: ...5 Press TTI Select To select an originator you must register the sender name originator in advance Registering the Sender Name Originator 6 Select an originator name 7 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 8 Change other settings if...

Page 506: ...s Communicating Function on the Advanced tab 5 Press Transmit Confirmation Transmit Conf Report is set to ON Memo Pressing Transmit Conf Report switches between ON and OFF 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 7 Change other setti...

Page 507: ...Sending a Fax Procedure 506 ...

Page 508: ...can register up to three sender names originators 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press User Install 5 Press or several times and press TTI Register Edit 6 Press an origi...

Page 509: ...508 ...

Page 510: ...dmin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press User Install 5 Press or several times and press Standard TTI 6 Select a sender name originator to use 7 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Topics Disclosing a Sender Name Originator to the Recipient C...

Page 511: ...anel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Other Settings 6 Press or several times and press Prefix 7 Enter a prefix 8 Press OK 9 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Using a Prefix When Sending a Fax You can atta...

Page 512: ... destination number 3 Press OK Using a Prefix When Registering a Speed Dial Number You can add a prefix to a speed dial number Fax Numbers 1 Press PreFix N on the fax number entry screen for speed dial registration 2 Enter a fax number Specifying a Destination Direct Entry 3 Press OK 511 ...

Page 513: ... and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Other Settings 6 Press Redial Tries 7 Enter the number of redial tries 8 Press OK 9 Press Redial Interval 10 Enter the redial interval 11 Press OK 12 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Memo If the ...

Page 514: ...ning Multiple Documents Continuously with the ADF Continuous Scan ADF Sending at a Specified Date and Time Delayed Tx Sending While a Document is being Scanned Memory Transmission Real time Transmission Sending a Fax after Calling Manual Transmission Manual Sending On hook dial Preventing Wrong Fax Transmissions 513 ...

Page 515: ... scans the center part of the A3 document in the same range as A4 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Set a document on the document glass 3 Press Fax 4 Press Continuous Scan Glass on the Advanced tab and set it to ON Memo Pressing Continuous Scan Glass switches between ON and OFF 5 Select the Fax tab 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination P...

Page 516: ...peat steps 8 and 9 for each fax transmission document if necessary 11 When scanning all sets of the documents is complete press Scan Complete Topics You can cancel a fax during a transmission Cancelling a Fax Transmission 515 ...

Page 517: ...ne scans the center part of the A3 document in the same range as A4 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Set a document in the ADF 3 Press Fax 4 Press Continuous Scan ADF on the Advanced tab and set it to ON Memo Pressing Continuous Scan ADF switches between ON and OFF 5 Select the Fax tab 6 Specify a destination Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Spe...

Page 518: ...peat steps 8 and 9 for each fax transmission document if necessary 11 When scanning all sets of the documents is complete press Scan Complete Topics You can cancel a fax during a transmission Cancelling a Fax Transmission 517 ...

Page 519: ...ction on the Advanced tab 5 Press Delayed Tx Memo To change the specified reservation time cancel it and make a new reservation Cancelling a Fax Transmission You can reserve a different fax transmission even if the machine is sending a fax 6 Specify the date and time at which to send the fax by using the 10 key pad or by pressing or Date and time are displayed in order of date time and minute 7 Pr...

Page 520: ...button Topics You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending a Fax Procedure 519 ...

Page 521: ...recipient without scanning the document in the Memory of this machine The transmission starts immediately after you complete transmission operation allowing you to check that the data is sent to the recipient Memory Tx is set by factory default To enable real time transmission follow the procedure below Note For the real time transmission and manual transmission preview images cannot be displayed ...

Page 522: ... Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch Button Specifying a Destination Transmission History and Reception History 7 Change other settings if necessary and then press the START button Topics You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending a Fax Procedure 521 ...

Page 523: ...transmission Check broadcast destinations Confirm dial Memo You do not need to disable Memory transmission Even if the machine displays the start screen of any function other than the fax function you can perform manual transmission by picking the handset up 1 Set a document in the ADF 2 Pick up the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine 3 Dial the destination number with the e...

Page 524: ...523 ...

Page 525: ... Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Fax 4 Press Off Hook on the Fax tab or Basic tab 5 Enter a destination fax number by using the 10 key pad on the operator panel 6 After you hear the receiving tone beep of the destination machine press the START button 524 ...

Page 526: ... enabled Memo The check broadcast destinations function is available only if multiple destinations are specified If Confirm Dial is also enabled the confirm dial function is executed first The check broadcast destinations function is not available with manual transmission Confirm Dial If the confirm dial function is enabled when you enter the destination number by using the 10 key pad you are aske...

Page 527: ...The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press OK 5 Press Fax Setup 6 Press Security Function 7 Press a desired security function and set it to ON 526 ...

Page 528: ...e Duplex Printing Setting So That You Can Hear Line Monitor Sound Forwarding a Fax to Another Fax Number Setting the Waiting Time from When an Incoming Call Arrives to When Reception Starts Response Waiting Time Setting When to Ring the External Telephone Tel Priority Mode Setting Fax Detection Mode Setting the T F Timer Setting TAD Mode Block Junk Fax Previewing a Received Fax 527 ...

Page 529: ... displayed on the display screen Even if the reception is complete the DATA IN MEMORY indicator lights as long as the data is saved in the Memory of this machine Memo Change the reception mode in Admin Setup User Install User Install If Memory overflow occurs during data reception the reception is canceled In such a case ask the sender to send the fax again Fax Ready Mode This mode is the factory ...

Page 530: ...ing machine function of the external telephone and fax Connect an external telephone with the answering machine function equipped in advance Receiving a Fax The answering machine rings a response message is played and fax reception automatically starts Receiving a Call The answering machine rings a response message is played and a message recording starts Memo Ans Fax Ready Mode may not work prope...

Page 531: ...ephone check how to connect the telephone to the machine Connecting a Telephone Line When Using the DRD Function DRD If you use the distinctive ring detection DRD function that is provided by a telephone company this mode is recommended 530 ...

Page 532: ...olve a problem If the problem is solved printing automatically starts Loading Paper If Paper Jams Occur Checking the Communication Status Transmission and Reception History 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Paper Setup 3 Press Select Tray 4 Press Fax 5 Select a paper tray to set 6 Select a setting The paper tray with ON Prior set is used ahead of another tray that holds paper of t...

Page 533: ... Statement Statement Paper Size Priority If a received fax is larger than a specified paper size the fax is reduced discarded or printed onto multiple sheets of paper depending on the reception print settings Setting a Print Method for When a Received Image Exceeds Paper Size 532 ...

Page 534: ...put to the rear output tray Memo If paper remains on the upper output tray LED flashes Not to flash LED from Device Settings Admin Setup Management System Setup set Output Tray Paper Exist Lamp to Disable 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Paper Setup 3 Press or several times and press Output Tray 4 Press Fax 5 Select an output tray 6 Press Back until the home screen is displayed 5...

Page 535: ...atio The reduction rate determines whether or not the machine automatically reduces the received image to the specified paper size Auto automatically reduces the image and 100 prints the image without reduction Rx Reduc Rate is set to Auto by factory default 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and pre...

Page 536: ...er Settings 6 Press or several times and press Reduc Margin 7 Enter a value between 0 and 100 mm 0 0 to 3 9 inches and then press OK 8 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Memo If the excess is larger than the specified reduction threshold value the excess is printed on the next page If the excess is smaller than the specified reduction threshold value the received image is reduced and pr...

Page 537: ...el 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Other Settings 6 Press or several times and press Duplex Setting Duplex to OFF is for simplex printing 7 Select a setting 8 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Available P...

Page 538: ...Duplex prints with the short edge bound 537 ...

Page 539: ...panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press User Install 5 Press or several times and press Monitor Control 6 Select a monitor control 7 Press Back until the home screen is displayed 538 ...

Page 540: ...ng function is disabled Register a forward destination by following the procedure below 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Fax Setting 6 Press Forwarding Setting 7 Press ON 8 E...

Page 541: ... reception 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Select Fax Setup 5 Select Other Settings 6 Press or several times and press Ring Response 7 Select a waiting time 8 Press Back until the home screen is di...

Page 542: ... default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Fax Setting 6 Press or several times and press Tel Priority Mode and set it to ON Memo Pressing Tel Priority Mode switches between ON and OFF ON The sender is assumed to make a voice call The telephone rings early OFF The sender is assumed to send a fax When the machine determines that the sender w...

Page 543: ... Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Fax Setting 6 Press or several times and press CNG Detection and set it to ON Memo Pressing CNG Detection switches between ON and OFF ON The machine detects fax beep signals and then automatically starts receiving a fa...

Page 544: ...ssword and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Fax Setting 6 Press or several times and press T F Timer Programming 7 Select a T F time 20 seconds If an incoming call is not answered within 20 seconds the machine starts receiving a fax automatically 35 seconds If an incoming call is not answered within 35 seconds ...

Page 545: ...ring machine finishes responding the fax reception starts If there is a problem with a fax reception using this type may improve the problem Type 2 Fax signal detection starts immediately after the answering machine telephone responds If the sender is sending a fax the reception starts automatically Even after the answering machine finishes responding the fax reception does not start If you usuall...

Page 546: ...545 ...

Page 547: ...hat are registered to block junk faxes Register four to eight digits of a fax number You can enter up to 10 numbers Mode 3 This mode is a combination of Mode 1 and Mode 2 This mode rejects the senders who are not registered in the speed dial numbers This mode also rejects the senders who are registered to block junk faxes OFF Junk faxes are not blocked Registering If Selecting OFF or Mode1 1 Press...

Page 548: ...ed box and then press Register Memo To change a number that has already been registered press Edit for the box in which the number you want to change is registered 11 Enter the last four to eight digits of the telephone number to block junk faxes by using the 10 key pad 12 Press OK 13 Press Close on a confirmation screen 14 To continue registering another number repeat the procedure from step 10 D...

Page 549: ...ess Registered List 8 Select a registered box and then press Delete 9 Press Yes on a confirmation screen The number is deleted Memo If you select No the number is not deleted and you return to step 9 10 To continue deleting another number repeat the procedure from step 8 548 ...

Page 550: ...ved faxes after previewing 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Store Document Settings 3 Press Received Documents 4 If the password entry screen appears enter a 4 digit password you entered when setting secure receive The list of received faxes appears 5 Press Preview for a document to print 6 Press Print 7 Press Yes on the confirmation screen Printing rec...

Page 551: ...nication Registering an Fcode Box Deleting a Registered Fcode Box Sending a Fax to a Destination Confidential Box Fcode Transmission Printing a Document That is Received in the Confidential Box of This Machine Receiving a Document That is Saved in a Destination Bulletin Board Box by Fax Fcode Polling Saving a Document in a Bulletin Board Box of This Machine Deleting a Document in a Bulletin Board ...

Page 552: ...ng you to perform confidential transmission To print a received document you must enter the specified PIN number This function is useful when sending or receiving a document that needs security protection Sending a Fax to a Destination Confidential Box Fcode Transmission Printing a Document That is Received in the Confidential Box of This Machine Fcode Bulletin Board Communication If an Fcode bull...

Page 553: ... to the machine allowing you to receive a fax data that you do not want to expose to third persons with Fcode communication 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Fcode Box 6 Press...

Page 554: ... 14 Press the registration button of Hold Time 15 Enter a value between 0 and 31 days and then press OK Memo Set Hold Time if necessary If you set 0 days the document is indefinitely retained 16 Press the registration button of I D Code 17 Enter a 4 digit PIN number and then press OK Note The entered PIN number is not displayed Be sure to write the PIN number down and keep it safe 553 ...

Page 555: ...Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Fcode Box 6 Press Register of a box number Memo To edit a registered Fcode bulletin board box select Edit 7 Press Bulletin Box 8 Press the regi...

Page 556: ...o You can enter up to 16 characters 10 Press OK 11 Press the registration button of Sub Address 12 Enter a sub address and then press OK Memo You can enter up to 20 characters including or 13 Press OK 555 ...

Page 557: ...d press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Fax Setup 5 Press Fcode Box 6 Press Delete of a box number to delete 7 Enter a PIN number if necessary and then press OK Memo To delete a confidential box enter the PIN number 8 Press Yes on a confirmation screen 556 ...

Page 558: ...the document glass 3 Press Fax 4 Press Communicating Function on the Advanced tab 5 Press Fcode Tx 6 Enter the sub address of the box that is registered to the recipient s machine The sub address is up to 20 characters in length 7 Press OK 8 Press Back 9 Add a destination on the Fax tab Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book Specifying a Destination One touch But...

Page 559: ...558 ...

Page 560: ...box number and then print the stored document 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Store Document Settings 3 Press Fcode Box 4 Press Select of a box number 5 Enter a PIN number and then press OK 6 Press Print of a file number to print 7 Press Yes on a confirmation screen Memo Received documents in an Fcode confidential box are automatically deleted after pr...

Page 561: ... cannot receive a fax 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Press Fax 3 Press Communicating Function on the Advanced tab 4 Press Fcode Polling 5 Enter the sub address of the bulletin board box that is registered to the sender s machine The sub address is up to 20 characters in length 6 Press OK 7 Press Back 8 Add a destination on the Fax tab Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying ...

Page 562: ...561 ...

Page 563: ...letin board box in advance Registering an Fcode Box 1 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 2 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 3 Press or several times and press Store Document Settings 4 Press Fcode Bulletin Board 5 Press Over Write of a box number 6 Press Yes on a confirmation screen Memo A document that is stored in an Fcode bulletin board box is not deleted even if the rec...

Page 564: ... 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Store Document Settings 3 Press Fcode Bulletin Board 4 Press Delete of a box number 5 Press Yes on a confirmation screen Memo A document that is stored in an Fcode bulletin board box is not deleted even if the recipient retrieves the document 563 ...

Page 565: ...x Reception from a Telephone Remotely Remote Switchover Number Setting Secure Reception Forwarding Received Document Data to an E mail Destination or Shared Folder Auto Delivery Saving Sent and Received Data Transmission Data Save 564 ...

Page 566: ...re dialing the remote switchover number When dialing the remote switchover number enter the next digit of the number within 3 seconds of dialing the previous digit 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 P...

Page 567: ...ng the 10 key pad and then press OK Note When previewing or printing received faxes you need to enter the password you set in this step If you press OK without entering a password previewing and printing can be performed without entering a password Memo To disable the secure reception press Setting and then press OFF in step 7 Printing an Image Stored with Secure Reception Print an image that is r...

Page 568: ...ts press Delete All To preview received documents individually press Preview for the document you want to preview To delete received documents one by one press delete for each document to be deleted 6 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Memo If Yes is set for Delete After Print the received document will be deleted after it is printed If No is set for Delete After Print the received docu...

Page 569: ...ernet Faxes and e mail attachment files The data is forwarded as a PDF or TIFF file depending on the file format of the received data You can register up to 100 sets of forwarding destinations for the auto delivery function 1 Open the Web page of this machine About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine on Basic Operations 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Se...

Page 570: ...6 Select ON for Automated Delivery 7 Select the check box of a required item for Search field 8 Select OFF for Print To print the received data select ON 569 ...

Page 571: ...9 Click Edit in Deliver To 10 Enter a destination e mail address and then click Add 11 Check that the entered address is displayed in Address List and then click OK 12 Click Edit in Deliver to 570 ...

Page 572: ...ile List and then click OK 14 Click Submit Memo If Forwarding Setting is enabled received faxes are not automatically delivered with this function A received fax is delivered as a PDF file If a received e mail attachment file is not a PDF JPEG or TIFF file the file is not forwarded The body text of received e mails cannot be forwarded 571 ...

Page 573: ...that this function can handle is limited If the Memory card space of the machine is insufficient to save received faxes Internet Faxes or e mail attachment files the transmission data is not automatically delivered 572 ...

Page 574: ...ent data and received data respectively The data is saved as a PDF or TIFF file depending on the file format of the source data Note The transmission data save function is not available when using the following functions Real time transmission Polling transmission by using Fcode bulletin board communication Reception by using Fcode confidential communication Secure Receive 1 Open the Web page of t...

Page 575: ...elect ON Memo The items in the screen is depending on your selected category 7 Click Select Profile List Register a profile in advance Before Using Scan To Shared Folder 8 Select a data save destination from Profile List and then click OK 9 Click Submit 574 ...

Page 576: ...eceived e mail attachment file is not a PDF JPEG or TIFF file the file is not saved The body text of an e mail cannot be saved The size of data that this function can handle is limited If the Memory space of the machine is insufficient to save received and sent faxes Internet Faxes or e mail attachment files the transmission data is not saved 575 ...

Page 577: ...Fax from a Computer Sending a PC Fax Sending a Fax from a Computer with a Cover Sheet Sending a PC Fax to Multiple Destinations at the Same Time Cancelling a PC Fax Transmission Managing the PC Fax Phone Book 576 ...

Page 578: ...en a fax is being sent from a computer to the machine This function is available for Windows OS only Memo This section uses Notepad as an example 1 Open a file 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select OKI MC873 FAX from Select Printer and then click Print 4 Specify a destination For details see the following Specifying a Destination Direct Entry Specifying a Destination Phone Book 5 Click OK Spe...

Page 579: ...d 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to enter all the destinations 6 Click OK Specifying a Destination Phone Book Memo Specify a destination in step 4 in Sending a PC Fax 1 Select the Phone book tab in Recipients 2 Select a destination and then click Add 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the destinations 4 Click OK 578 ...

Page 580: ... 3 Select OKI MC873 FAX from Select Printer 4 Click Preferences 5 Select the Cover Sheet tab 6 Select Print all recipients information on each cover sheet or Print only one recipient s information on each cover sheet 7 Select a format to use from Select cover sheet format To display an enlarged image of each format click Zoom To print the recipient s fax number on the cover sheet select the Add th...

Page 581: ...cover sheet on the Sender Details dialog by clicking Detail 9 Click OK 10 Select OKI MC873 FAX from Select Printer and then click Print 11 Specify a destination Sending a PC Fax 12 Click OK 580 ...

Page 582: ... just by performing one operation Managing the PC Fax Phone Book 1 Open a file 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select OKI MC873 FAX from Select Printer and then click Print 4 Select the Phone book tab in Recipients 5 Select a group from the right field and then click Add 6 Click OK to start the transmission 581 ...

Page 583: ...sion from a computer after the data is saved in the machine For details on how to cancel a fax transmission that is saved in the Memory of this machine refer to Cancelling a Reserved Transmission in Cancelling a Fax Transmission 1 Double click the printer icon on the tool bar 2 Select the job to cancel in the print queue 3 Select Cancel from the Document menu 582 ...

Page 584: ...ster the same name You can register the same fax number with a different name 1 Click Start and then select Devices and Printers 2 Right click the OKI MC873 icon and then select Printing preferences OKI MC873 FAX 3 Click Phone book on the Setup tab 4 Select New FAX number from the FAX number menu 5 Enter a destination name in Name in the New FAX number dialog box 583 ...

Page 585: ...tions The name and fax number that are entered by following the procedure can be printed on the cover sheet Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group If you group registered destinations you can send a fax to multiple destinations at the same time 1 Click Start and then select Devices and Printers 2 Right click the OKI MC873 icon and then select Printing preferences OKI MC873 FAX 3 Click Phone ...

Page 586: ...the right field of the dialog box 9 Select Save from the FAX number menu 10 Click OK in the confirmation window 11 Select Exit from the FAX number menu Exporting the Phone Book Data to a CSV File Export The import export function enables you to manage fax numbers in the phone book that is created with a different computer If you follow the procedure below you can export a phone book that is create...

Page 587: ...CSV file They are saved in order of the names fax numbers and comments 7 Close the phone book Importing the Phone Book Data That is Exported to a CSV File Import The import function enables you to import fax numbers in the phone book that is created with a different computer into your computer Note Registered entries are not imported Importing the Phone Book Data 1 Copy the exported phone book to ...

Page 588: ...Associating a New Definition with the Phone Book Format If you want to import a CSV file with the format that is different from that of the phone book select a CSV definition file and associate the definition with the phone book format 1 Copy the exported phone book to a different computer 2 Click Start and then select Devices and Printers 3 Right click the OKI MC873 icon and then select Printing ...

Page 589: ...ary Select Comma for Field Delimiter Memo You can continue operating even if you do not specify a definition file If you do not specify a definition file select whether to save a new definition file in the dialog box that is displayed after step 7 9 Click Next 10 Associate the definition that you are importing with the phone book definition and then click OK 11 Select Save from the FAX number menu...

Page 590: ...589 ...

Page 591: ...Sending Data to the Fax Server Basic Procedure for Scan to Fax Server Enabling the Scan to Fax Server Function Editing a Destination E mail Address Editing E mail Body Text 590 ...

Page 592: ...e Using Scan To E mail Memo You can not use mixed size documents The document data that is sent with the Scan to Fax Server function may not be printed properly depending on the recipient s unit The details on the Scan to Fax Server function are the same as those on the Scan To E mail function Sending Scanned Data as an E mail Attachment 1 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 2 Set a document ...

Page 593: ...You can change other settings for fax transmissions Setting Scanning for Transmission Sending a Fax Procedure 592 ...

Page 594: ... 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press FaxServer Function 5 Press Environmental Settings 6 Press FaxServer Function 7 Press ON 8 Press Yes on a confirmation screen The machine automatically restart...

Page 595: ...o the e mail reception specifications of the fax server The virtual domain and others may be required to be set on the mail server due to the certain fax server operating environment 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaa...

Page 596: ...word and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press FaxServer Function 5 Press Environmental Settings 6 Press Text Text is set to ON 7 Press Back until the home screen is displayed 8 Press Fax Internet Fax or the FAX button 9 Press Internet Fax 10 Press E mail Body on the Advanced tab 11 Press Select Text 12 Select a text If you select Ma...

Page 597: ...Descriptions of Screens for Fax Names and Functions of Screen Items for Fax Names and Functions of Screen Items for Internet Fax 596 ...

Page 598: ...ting The setting can be changed by Administrator Setting 3 One touch buttons Displays destinations assigned to one touch buttons Press a button to add a destination 4 Function Settings Displays the current settings The setting can be changed for certain functions 5 Displays Help topics Basic Tab Item Description 1 Manual Dial Enter a fax number manually to use it as a destination 2 Speed Dial Disp...

Page 599: ...a level of scan density 2 Duplex Scan Specifies duplex scanning Set this function when scanning both sides of a document 3 Continuous Scan Glass Scans multiple documents as a single job using the document glass 4 Continuous Scan ADF Scans multiple documents as a single job using the ADF 5 Preview Displays fax images to send on the touch panel 6 Edge Erase Eliminates a black shadow that may appear ...

Page 600: ... to which a fax is sent Function Settings Scan Setting Tab Item Description 1 Setting display area 1 Displays the current settings for displayed items 2 Setting display area 2 Displays a list of settings that are not set by items displayed in setting display area 1 599 ...

Page 601: ...h buttons Displays destinations assigned to one touch buttons Press a button to add a destination 4 Function Settings Displays the current settings The setting can be changed for certain functions Basic Tab Item Description 1 Address Book Displays e mail addresses registered in the Address Book Select an e mail address as a destination from the Address Book 2 Group List Displays a list of groups i...

Page 602: ...ocument 2 Reply To Specifies an e mail address as a reply destination If the recipient replies to the received e mail the reply is sent to the e mail address specified here 3 Subject Specifies the subject of the e mail 4 E mail Body Specifies the body of the e mail 5 File Name Specifies a file name for the scanned file If not specified the file will be named according to the factory default settin...

Page 603: ...ument background removal Function Settings Destination Tab Add edit or delete a destination to which a document is sent Function Settings Scan Setting Tab Item Description 1 Setting display area 1 Displays the current settings for displayed items 2 Setting display area 2 Displays a list of settings that are not set by items displayed in setting display area 1 602 ...

Page 604: ...603 ...

Page 605: ... panel Replacing Consumables This section describes how to replace the consumables Cleaning Each Part of the Machine This section describes how to clean each part of the machine Updating Installed Drivers This section describes how to update computer drivers You must log in the administrator to complete this procedure Removing Installed Drivers This section describes how to remove computer drivers...

Page 606: ... black Toner Cartridge Only For C cyan M magenta Y yellow Toner Cartridge Replacing the Image Drum Replacing the Image Drum and Toner Cartridge at the Same Time Replacing the Belt Unit Replacing the Fuser Unit Replacing the Feed Roller Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Replacing the Feed Roller MP Tray Replacing the Stapler Cartridge 605 ...

Page 607: ...oner immediately seek medical advice If you inhale toner gargle with a large amount of water and move to a place with fresh air Seek medical advice if necessary If toner lands on your hands or other areas of skin wash thoroughly with soap and water If toner gets into your eyes immediately rinse with a large amount of water Seek medical advice if necessary If you swallow toner spit it out Seek medi...

Page 608: ...es for services for problems caused by the use of consumables other than Oki data genuine consumables are incurred regardless of the warranty or in the maintenance contract Although the use of non genuine consumables does not always result in problems use extra care when using them 607 ...

Page 609: ...ickly after it runs out as not doing so may cause the image drum to be damaged Note Have a new toner cartridge ready as the print quality declines after more than one year following breaking the seal If you replace the toner cartridge image drum while it is being used the amount of toner used will not be counted normally By opening and closing the output tray after the message Color toner has run ...

Page 610: ...Cartridge 1 Prepare a new K toner cartridge 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 4 Turn the blue lever 3 of the toner cartridge toward you until its top aligns on the mark 609 ...

Page 611: ...ne Do not throw used toner cartridge in the fire They may explode and the toner inside may fly off and cause getting burned Note When toner powder drops to the paper feeding area inside the machine wipe it off with a wet cloth that has been well wrung Possible to get burned 610 ...

Page 612: ...by aligning its left side indentation 7 with the protrusion 8 on the image drum so the toner cartridge and image drum K color label align Then insert the right side gently into place Note Do not insert a toner cartridge without removing the tape 10 Turn the blue lever 3 of the toner cartridge backward until its top aligns on the mark while pressing the toner cartridge 611 ...

Page 613: ...11 Close the front cover 2 Note The front cover cannot be closed if the output tray is not closed securely 12 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 13 Please recycle toner cartridges 612 ...

Page 614: ...Memo If you have to dispose of used toner cartridges put them into polyethylene bags or other container and be sure to follow the regulations or instructions of your local government 613 ...

Page 615: ... Toner Cartridge Only 1 Prepare new toner cartridges 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 4 Press the button C and open the Output Tray 3 Possible to get burned 614 ...

Page 616: ...r 4 of the toner cartridge toward you until its top align on the mark 7 Lift the toner cartridge 5 from right side and remove it from the machine Do not throw used toner cartridge in the fire They may explode and the toner inside may fly off and cause getting burned 8 Unpack a new toner cartridge Possible to get burned 615 ...

Page 617: ...ts left side indentation 7 with the protrusion 8 on the image drum so the toner cartridge and image drum color labels align Then insert the right side gently into place Note Do not insert a toner cartridge without removing the tape 12 Turn the blue lever 4 of the toner cartridge backward until its top align on the mark while pressing the toner cartridge 616 ...

Page 618: ...g quality may deteriorate 13 Wipe the lens of the LED head with a soft tissue paper lightly Note Do not use solvents such as methyl alcohol or thinners They damage the LED head 14 Close the Output Tray 3 by pushing the both sides of the Output Tray 3 firmly 617 ...

Page 619: ...not closed securely 16 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 17 Please recycle toner cartridges Memo If you have to dispose of used toner cartridges put them into polyethylene bags or other container and be sure to follow the regulations or instructions of your local government 618 ...

Page 620: ...619 ...

Page 621: ...s Printing quality may deteriorate after 1 year following the unpacking of the toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge with a new one Though opening and closing the output tray may extend the life of an image drum for a while it is recommended to replace it soon after the Install New image drum is displayed When the Device Setting Admin Setup Management System Setup Near Life Status is set to ...

Page 622: ...aying the COLOR Image Drum Near Life message Set from Device Setting Admin Setup User Install Drum Near Life Timing Available values are from 500 to 5 000 in 500 increaments 1 Prepare new image drum 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Insert your finger into the recess on the lever B side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 4 Press the ...

Page 623: ... a flat surface 7 Turn the blue lever 6 of the toner cartridge toward you until its top align on the mark while pressing the toner cartridge 8 Lift the toner cartridge 5 from the right side and remove it from the image drum 9 Unpack a new image drum and place it on a flat surface 10 Remove the protective sheets 11 Remove the toner cover 622 ...

Page 624: ...mage drum color label align Then insert the right side gently into place 13 Turn the blue lever 6 of the toner cartridge backward until its top align on the mark while pressing the toner cartridge 14 Check the label color of the new image drum and place the drum into the machine 15 Close the Output Tray 3 by pushing the both sides of the Output Tray 3 firmly 623 ...

Page 625: ...ont cover cannot be closed if the Output Tray is not closed securely 17 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 18 Please recycle image drums Memo If you must dispose of an image drum put it in a plastic bag or similar container and 624 ...

Page 626: ...dispose of it in accordance with your municipality s ordinances or guidelines 625 ...

Page 627: ...r room light Use Oki Data genuine consumables to ensure optimum performance of the products Charges for services for problems caused by the use of consumables other than Oki data genuine consumables are incurred regardless of the warranty or in the maintenance contract Although use of non genuine consumables does not always result in problems use extra care when using them 1 Prepare new image drum...

Page 628: ...fy an empty toner cartridge by its label color 6 Remove the image drum 4 from the machine and place it on a flat surface Do not throw used image drum and toner cartridge in the fire They may explode and the toner inside may fly off and cause getting burned Possible to get burned Possible to get burned 627 ...

Page 629: ...tridge 11 Shake the cartridge several times vertically and horizontally 12 Remove the tape 5 from the toner cartridge 13 Insert a new toner cartridge 6 by aligning its left side indentation 7 with the protrusion 8 on the image drum so that the toner cartridge and image drum color label align Then insert the right side gently into place 628 ...

Page 630: ...il its top align on the mark while pressing the toner cartridge 15 Check a label color of a new image drum and place the drum into the machine 16 Close the Output Tray 3 by pushing the both sides of the Output Tray 3 firmly 17 Close the front cover 2 Note The front cover cannot be closed if the Output Tray is not closed securely 629 ...

Page 631: ...scanner unit 19 Please recycle image drums and toner cartridges Memo If you must dispose of an image drum put it in a plastic bag or similar container and dispose of it in accordance with your municipality s ordinances or guidelines 630 ...

Page 632: ...nit use it until the end of its useable life If you remove the belt unit and install and use another one before its usable life has expired the use life will not be correctly displayed When the Device Setting Admin Setup Management System Setup Near Life Status is set to Disable the Belt Unit Near Life message does not appear The image drum the green tube is very delicate Handle it carefully Do no...

Page 633: ...chine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 4 Press the button C and open the Output Tray 3 The fuser unit is extremely hot Do not touch it 5 Take all the four image drums out of the machine and then place Possible to get burned 632 ...

Page 634: ...the image drums you took out with paper so that the image drums do not expose to the light 7 Turn the blue locks 4 on each side of the belt unit in direction of the arrow to unlock 8 Remove the belt unit by holding the blue lever 633 ...

Page 635: ...lt unit with your hand and support lower part with other hand Set the belt unit into the machine 10 Turn the blue locks 4 on each side of the belt unit in direction of the arrow 11 Return all the four image drums to the machine 634 ...

Page 636: ...ut Tray 3 by pushing the both sides of the Output Tray firmly 13 Close the front cover 2 Note The front cover cannot be closed if the Output Tray is not closed securely 14 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 635 ...

Page 637: ...15 Please recycle belt unit Memo If you must dispose of a belt unit put it in a plastic bag or similar container and dispose of it in accordance with your municipality s ordinances or guidelines 636 ...

Page 638: ... you replace the fuser unit use it until the end of its useable life If you remove the fuser unit and install and use another one before its usable life has expired the use life will not be correctly displayed When the Device Setting Admin Setup Management System Setup Near Life Status is set to Disable the Fuser Unit Near Life message does not appear Do not expose the image drum to direct sunligh...

Page 639: ...3 Since the fuser unit gets hot carry out the operation carefully and when lifting it up you must hold it by the handle Do not try to hold it whilst it is hot Wait until it has cooled down and then carry out the operation 5 Pull forward the left locking lever 4 of the fuser unit to unlock 6 Hold the fuser unit handle 5 and lift the fuser unit out of the machine Possible to get burned 638 ...

Page 640: ...old the handle and place the new fuser unit into the machine 8 Push back the left locking lever 4 of the fuser unit to lock 9 Close the Output Tray 3 by pushing the both sides of the Output Tray firmly 639 ...

Page 641: ...10 Close the front cover 2 Note The front cover cannot be closed if the output tray is not closed securely 11 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 12 Please recycle fuser unit Memo 640 ...

Page 642: ...If you must dispose of a fuser unit put it in a plastic bag or similar container and dispose of it in accordance with your municipality s ordinances or guidelines 641 ...

Page 643: ...tional The paper feed roller for Tray 1 differs from those for Tray 2 3 4 in form Identify the tray on which paper feed roller is to be replaced before preparing a new paper feed roller The procedure for replacing the paper feed roller for Tray 1 is described here as an example The same procedure is applicable to those of Tray 2 3 4 1 Make sure that you have everything mentioned below in the paper...

Page 644: ...ed roller 3 to the left to remove 4 While opening the tabs 4 on the paper feed roller in the back of the paper cassette outward and slide the feed roller 5 to the left to remove 5 Attach a new paper feed roller with gear to the axis in the back 6 Attach a new paper feed roller without gear to the axis in the front 643 ...

Page 645: ...in the projections on the both sides of paper cassettes inward and remove the separating roller and spring Note For Tray 2 3 4 removed springs are used later Do not dispose them 10 Attach a new spring to a new separating roller For Tray 2 3 4 use the springs removed in Step 9 11 Set the spring to the paper cassette and push the separating roller into the paper cassette 644 ...

Page 646: ...jections of the paper cassette into the dimples on the both sides of the separating roller 13 Close the separating roller cover 14 Load paper in the paper cassette and insert the paper cassette into this machine 645 ...

Page 647: ... into the front recesses 3 Slightly lifting the MP tray 1 press the right arm 2 inward then unlock the tab 3 4 In the same manner slightly lifting the MP tray press the left arm inward then unlock the tab 5 Open the paper set cover until it touches to the machine body Open the tabs on the upper paper feed roller outward and slide the 646 ...

Page 648: ...g the separating roller cover open the tabs on the lower paper feed roller outward and slide the paper feed roller to the left to remove 8 Keep pressing the center of the MP tray and open the separating roller cover forward 9 Remove the separating roller 647 ...

Page 649: ...ray and set a new separating roller Memo Do not touch the rubber part of the roller 11 Close the separating roller cover 12 Set the paper feed roller without gear to the lower axis 13 Set the paper feed roller with gear to the upper axis 648 ...

Page 650: ...e sure to put it back in place 16 In the same manner while pressing the left arm on the MP tray slightly lift the MP tray and hook the tab Note Closing the MP tray without putting the tab back in place may crack the paper set cover Be sure to put it back in place 17 Close the MP tray If the MP tray cannot be closed press the paper setting part of the MP tray downward to put the paper set cover bac...

Page 651: ...650 ...

Page 652: ...Replacing the Stapler Cartridge 1 Open the stapler cover 2 Remove the empty cartridge 3 Attach the new cartridge 4 Close the stapler cover 651 ...

Page 653: ...e machine and parts Cleaning the Surface of the Machine Cleaning the Document Glass Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers and Document Holding Rollers Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers MP Tray Cleaning the LED Head 652 ...

Page 654: ...ubricate the machine with oil Do not apply oil 1 Turn the machine off Turning the Machine Off 2 Wipe the surface of the machine with a soft cloth that has been slightly moistened with water or neutral detergent and then squeezed well Note Do not use other than water or neutral detergent 3 Dry the surface of the machine with a dry soft cloth 653 ...

Page 655: ...ocument holding pad document glass and ADF document glass gently with a soft cloth that has been slightly moistened with water and squeezed well Memo If the document glass surface and document holding pad are very dirty wipe gently with a soft cloth that has been moistened with neutral detergent and squeezed well and then wipe again with a soft cloth that has been slightly moistened with water and...

Page 656: ...655 ...

Page 657: ... paper jam may occur Clean the ADF once a month to prevent these problems Note Do not use benzine thinners or alcohol They may damage the plastic parts of the machine 1 Check the ADF cover 2 Pull the ADF cover open lever D and open the ADF cover 3 Open the Roller cover 4 Wipe the document feeding rollers with a soft cloth lightly moistened with water Wipe the whole surface of the roller while 656 ...

Page 658: ...ument feed roller is very dirty wipe gently with a soft cloth that has been moistened with neutral detergent and squeezed well and then wipe again with a soft cloth that has been slightly moistened with water and squeezed well 6 Close the ADF cover 7 Open the scanner unit 657 ...

Page 659: ...Pull the lever and open the document holding pad 9 Wipe the paper feed roller with a soft cloth that has been moistened with water and then squeezed well 10 Put the document holding pad back in place 658 ...

Page 660: ...11 Close the scanner unit 659 ...

Page 661: ...ample of Tray 1 is covered in the following procedure and the same procedure applies to Tray 2 3 4 1 Pull out the tray 1 2 Wipe the two paper feed rollers 2 inside the machine with a wet cloth that has been wrung out well 3 Remove paper loaded in the tray 4 Wipe the paper feed roller 3 on the tray with a wet cloth that has been wrung out well 660 ...

Page 662: ...5 Load paper in the tray 6 Push the tray back into the machine 7 Close the tray 661 ...

Page 663: ...MP tray 1 Open the MP tray 2 forward by inserting your fingers into the front recesses 1 2 Slightly lifting the MP tray 2 press the right arm 3 inward then unlock the tab 4 3 In the same manner slightly lifting the MP tray 2 press the left arm 3 inward then unlock the tab 4 662 ...

Page 664: ...r 5 until it touches to the machine body 5 Wipe the rollers Note Do not damage the paper end sensor lever when cleaning the rollers 6 Open the separation roller cover 7 forward while pressing the center part of the MP tray 663 ...

Page 665: ...7 Wipe the separation rollers 8 with a wet cloth that has been wrung out well 8 Close the separation roller cover 7 9 Lower the paper set cover 5 664 ...

Page 666: ...MP tray 2 and hook the tab 4 Note Closing the MP tray without putting the tab back in place may crack the paper set cover Be sure to put it back in place 11 In the same manner while pressing the left arm 3 on the MP tray 2 inward slightly lift the MP tray 2 and hook the tab 665 ...

Page 667: ...ing the tab back in place may crack the paper set cover Be sure to put it back in place 12 Close the MP tray If the MP tray cannot be closed press the paper setting part of the MP tray downward to put the paper set cover back in place 666 ...

Page 668: ...age the LED head Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or strong light approximately 1 500 lux or more Even under room lighting do not leave the image drum for 5 minutes or more 1 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 2 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 3 Press the button C and...

Page 669: ... lenses of the LED heads with a soft tissue paper lightly 5 Close the Output Tray by pushing the both sides of the Output Tray firmly 6 Close the front cover Note The front cover cannot be closed if the Output Tray is not closed securely Possible to get burned 668 ...

Page 670: ...7 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 669 ...

Page 671: ... installed in a computer You must have the administrator rights for the computer to complete this procedure Updating the Printer Driver Windows Updating the Fax Driver Windows Updating the Scanner Driver Windows Updating the Printer Driver Mac OS X Updating the Scanner Driver Mac OS X 670 ...

Page 672: ...lect a language and then click OK 3 Read the license agreement and then click Agree 4 Install the driver by following the instructions If the driver of the previous version is already installed the screen to select updating will be displayed Follow the instructions Also rebooting the computer may be required before updating the driver 5 If the Program Capability Assistant dialog box is displayed a...

Page 673: ...ct a language and then click OK 3 Read the license agreement and then click Agree 4 Install the driver by following the instructions If the driver of the previous version is already installed the screen to select updating will be displayed Follow the instructions Also rebooting the computer may be required before updating the driver 5 If the Program Capability Assistant dialog box is displayed aft...

Page 674: ... the latest driver on the Oki Data Web site Note You must log in as the administrator to perform this procedure 1 Double click the downloaded file The file is extracted and then the installer starts 2 Install the driver by following the instructions 673 ...

Page 675: ...ils on the latest driver on the Oki Data Web site Note You must log in as the administrator to perform this procedure 1 Remove the driver Removing the Printer Driver Mac OS X 2 Install a new driver Installing a Driver and Software to a Computer 674 ...

Page 676: ...he latest driver on the Oki Data Web site Note You must log in as the administrator to perform this procedure 1 Remove the scanner driver Removing the Scanner Driver Mac OS X 2 Install a new scanner driver Installing a Driver and Software to a Computer 675 ...

Page 677: ...s installed in a computer You must have the administrator rights for the computer to complete this procedure Removing the Printer Driver Windows Removing the Fax Driver Windows Removing the Scanner Driver Windows Removing the Printer Driver Mac OS X Removing the Scanner Driver Mac OS X 676 ...

Page 678: ... a computer and then repeat steps 1 to 2 4 Select an icon in Printers and Faxes and then click Print server properties on the top bar 5 Select the Drivers tab 6 If Change Driver Settings is displayed click it 7 Select a driver to remove and then click Remove 8 When a message is displayed to ask you to select whether you want to remove the driver only or the driver and package from the system selec...

Page 679: ...12 Restart the computer 678 ...

Page 680: ...omputer and then repeat steps 1 to 2 4 Select an icon in Printers and Faxes and then click Print server properties on the top bar 5 Select the Drivers tab 6 If Change Driver Settings is displayed click it 7 Select a driver to remove and then click Remove 8 When a message is displayed to ask you to select whether you want to remove the driver only or the driver and package from the system select to...

Page 681: ...12 Restart the computer 680 ...

Page 682: ...edure 1 Click Start and then select Control Panel Uninstall a program 2 Select OKI Universal Scanner and then click Uninstall 3 If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed click Yes 4 When a confirmation message is displayed click Yes 5 Click Finish on the Uninstallation Complete screen 681 ...

Page 683: ...lose the Printers Scanners dialog box 5 Insert the Software DVD ROM into a computer 6 Double click OKI Drivers PS Uninstaller 7 Follow the on screen instructions enter the administrator password and then click OK until the uninstallation procedure is complete 8 Remove the Software DVD ROM from the computer For Mac OS X 10 7 to 10 8 1 Select System Preferences from the Apple menu 2 Select Print Sca...

Page 684: ... Preferences from the Apple menu 2 Select Print Fax 3 Select a device to remove and then click If a confirmation message is displayed click Delete Printer 4 Close the Print Fax dialog box 5 Insert the Software DVD ROM into a computer 6 Double click OKI Drivers PS Uninstaller 7 Follow the on screen instructions enter the administrator password and then click OK until the uninstallation procedure is...

Page 685: ...g in as the administrator to perform this procedure 1 From the hard disk select Library Image Capture Devices 2 Delete OKI Scanner 3 From the hard disk select Applications OKIDATA Scanner 4 Delete the Network Scanner Setup Tool 5 Restart the computer 684 ...

Page 686: ... Settings Initialize Memory and settings saved in the machine Initializing Flash Memory Initializing the Device Settings Initializing the Network Settings Initializing the Job Macro and Fax Transmission and Reception Data 685 ...

Page 687: ...efault administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press Storage Maintenance Setup 6 Press Initial Lock to change the display to Disable 7 Press Back 8 Press Flash Memory Setup or select a storage to format from HDD Setup 9 Press Initialize 10 If HDD is selected in Step 9 press Format Partition and then select from the following...

Page 688: ...11 Press Yes on the confirmation screen 687 ...

Page 689: ...onfidential box Registered job macros Dialing logs E mail logs 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press Reset Settings A message is displayed confirming y...

Page 690: ...d press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Network Menu 5 Press Network Setup 6 Press Factory Defaults 7 Press Yes The network card is rebooted to initialize the settings Initializing from the Operator Panel of this Machine Boot Menu If you cannot initialize from the configuration menu of this machine you can initialize from the operato...

Page 691: ...4 Press 1 on the 10 key pad 5 Press 1 on the 10 key pad 690 ...

Page 692: ...ential box Registered job macros Dialing logs E mail logs Received fax data including images received with Secure Receive 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press OK 5 Press or several times and press...

Page 693: ...Problems About Problems with Printing Results Problems about Software Problems on the Machine or Paper Network Problems AirPrint Problems Google Cloud Print Problems Fax Error Codes If an Error Message is Displayed on the Operator Panel Memo What if you cannot find expected search results If you cannot find expected search results please read Using the Search Function 692 ...

Page 694: ...rror Code is 370 371 373 If the Error Code is 372 If the Error Code is 380 If the Error Code is 381 If the Error Code is 382 383 385 389 If the Error Code is 384 If the Error Code is 390 If the Error Code is 391 392 393 or 394 693 ...

Page 695: ... jammed paper inside the machine If jammed paper remains remove it 3 Check for jammed paper in the duplex unit If jammed paper remains pull it out gently Check the back side of the duplex unit and remove jammed paper gently if it remains 4 Open the upper duplex unit cover 1 and check for jammed paper If jammed paper remains pull it out gently and close the cover 5 Replace the duplex unit E into th...

Page 696: ...Task is complete 695 ...

Page 697: ...the front cover 1 Remove a document from the ADF or document glass 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 696 ...

Page 698: ... edge of jammed paper can be seen and then go to step 11 If you cannot find jammed paper go to step 5 5 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 6 Take out the duplex unit E by pulling it obliquely upward while holding the center recess on the back of the machine 697 ...

Page 699: ...t If jammed paper remains pull it out gently Check the back side of the duplex unit and remove jammed paper gently if it remains 9 Open the upper duplex unit cover 3 and check for jammed paper If jammed paper remains remove it and close the cover 10 Replace the duplex unit E to the machine 11 Close the front cover 2 698 ...

Page 700: ...699 ...

Page 701: ...the front cover 1 Remove a document from the ADF or document glass 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 700 ...

Page 702: ...4 Remove the jammed paper gently in the direction of the arrow if an edge of jammed paper can be seen 5 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 6 Close the front cover 2 701 ...

Page 703: ...Task is complete 702 ...

Page 704: ...as occurred near the fuser unit or the image drum Remove the jammed paper by following the procedure below 1 Remove a document from the ADF or document glass 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 703 ...

Page 705: ... the output tray 3 The fuser unit is extremely hot Do not touch it 5 Remove all four image drums and place them on a flat surface 6 Cover the removed image drums with paper so that the image drums are not exposed to light Possible to get burned 704 ...

Page 706: ...can be seen Pull out the jammed paper gently while lifting the release levers 4 on the fuser unit if an edge of jammed paper cannot be seen If an edge of jammed paper still remains inside the unit pull out the jammed paper gently to the rear of the machine 8 Return all four image drums into the machine carefully 705 ...

Page 707: ...Memo When closing the output tray beware of the front cover The front cover may open and the output tray may pop up 10 Close the front cover 2 Note The front cover cannot be closed if the output tray is not closed securely 11 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 706 ...

Page 708: ...707 ...

Page 709: ...d a paper jam has occurred near the image drum Remove the jammed paper by following the procedure below 1 Remove a document from the ADF or document glass 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 708 ...

Page 710: ... the output tray 3 The fuser unit is extremely hot Do not touch it 5 Remove all four image drums and place them on a flat surface 6 Cover the removed image drums with paper so that the image drums are not exposed to light Possible to get burned 709 ...

Page 711: ...7 Remove the jammed paper remaining inside of the unit 8 Lift the left lock lever 4 of the fuser unit forward 9 Hold the fuser unit handle 5 and lift the fuser unit out of the machine 710 ...

Page 712: ...ly 11 If jammed paper remains in the machine hold the both sides of the paper to remove it gently 12 Hold the fuser unit handle 5 and place the fuser unit into the machine 13 Push the left lock lever 4 of the fuser unit backward 14 Return all four image drums into the machine carefully 711 ...

Page 713: ...th sides of the cover firmly Memo When closing the output tray beware of the front cover The front cover may open and the output tray may pop up 16 Close the front cover 2 Cannot close the front cover securely if the output tray is not closed 712 ...

Page 714: ...17 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 713 ...

Page 715: ...he upper output tray Follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper 1 Remove a document from the ADF and document glass 2 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 3 Remove the jammed paper 4 Hold the handle A to close the scanner unit 714 ...

Page 716: ...715 ...

Page 717: ...nce Remove the jammed paper by following the procedure below 1 Remove a document from the ADF and document glass 2 If there is any paper on the MP tray lift the paper set cover 1 and take it out 3 Hold the handle A to open the scanner unit 4 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 2 to open the front cover 3 forward 716 ...

Page 718: ...5 Remove the jammed paper gently by pulling the edge of paper Remove the paper from the back gently if the edge of paper cannot be seen 6 Close the front cover 3 717 ...

Page 719: ...7 If loading paper on MP tray lift the paper set cover 1 and set the paper with the print side face up 8 Lower the paper set cover 1 Task is complete 718 ...

Page 720: ... Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 This procedure uses Tray 1 as an example 1 Gently pull out from the machine the tray for which an error is indicated 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If jammed paper cannot be found check the positions of paper guides and paper stopper in the tray and ensure that paper is correctly loaded 3 Push the tray back into the machine 719 ...

Page 721: ...4 Insert your finger into the lever B on the right side of the machine and pull the front cover open lever 1 to open the front cover 2 forward 5 Close the front cover 720 ...

Page 722: ...If a Document Jam Occurs If a Document is Visible in the Paper Path If a Document Jams in the ADF Automatic Document Feeder 721 ...

Page 723: ...s Visible in the Paper Path 1 Open the ADF cover 2 Pull out the document upward 3 Close the ADF cover Remove the document on the document tray and then close the ADF cover Otherwise documents may be torn or folded 722 ...

Page 724: ... ADF cover 2 Remove the jammed document Proceed to step 4 if you cannot remove the jammed document Note Do not try to remove the document by force 3 If you were able to remove the document proceed to step 7 4 Open the inner cover 5 If you can see the edge of the jammed document pull it out gently 723 ...

Page 725: ...oceed to step 7 7 Close the ADF cover If you cannot see the jammed document proceed to step 8 This completes the procedure Remove the document on the document tray and then close the ADF cover Otherwise documents may be torn or folded 8 Open the document holder cover 724 ...

Page 726: ...9 Pull down the lever to open the document holding pad 10 Pull the jammed paper slowly to remove it 11 Return the document holding pad to its original position 12 Close the document holder cover 725 ...

Page 727: ...This completes the procedure Memo If an error occurs while copying the copying gets canceled 726 ...

Page 728: ... problem occurs in this machine the STATUS button lights up or flashes Press the STATUS button and check the problem status 1 Press the STATUS button 2 Press System Status 3 Select an item Checking the Device Situation and Job Status You can check the residual life of consumables the counter information and the job list from the STATUS button 1 Press the STATUS button 2 Press Device Information 3 ...

Page 729: ...Copy Problems Memo If you cannot solve a problem with the following solutions contact your dealer Unable to Copy The Copied Output is Different from the Original Other Problems Copy 728 ...

Page 730: ...opying cannot be performed depending on the paper size paper type or paper weight Load the appropriate paper for duplex printing and then set the paper size document type and document weight correctly Loading Paper Is the media type of the paper tray set to Plain or Recycled If Paper feed is set to Auto set the media type for the paper tray to Plain or Recycled Loading Paper Is there a paper jam C...

Page 731: ... copy mixed size documents Is Mixed Size set to OFF Set Mixed Size to ON Copying Different Size Documents Mixed Size Is the size of your document supported for making mixed size copies Use documents sizes supported for mixed size copying Copying Different Size Documents Mixed Size Is paper of the required sizes loaded Load paper of the required sizes on each paper tray The paper trays need to be s...

Page 732: ...731 ...

Page 733: ...k Copy enabled Turn Book Copy to OFF Copying Two Page Spread Separately onto Two Sheets Book Copy A part of the document image is missing on the copied output Is Edge Erase set to ON Set Edge Erase to OFF Erasing Edge Shadows Edge Erase Is Center Erase enabled Turn Center Erase to OFF Erasing Shadow Lines Center Erase Is Outside Erase enabled Turn Outside Erase to OFF Erasing Outside of Documents ...

Page 734: ...ection set to Auto The following documents may be copied in color Yellowed documents Documents with colored background Set the color selection to Mono Switching Color Modes You can change the criteria for determining color document and black and white document from Auto Color Judge Level Scanner Setup 733 ...

Page 735: ...copy job is cancelled Has any error occurred A copy job is cancelled when a specific error occurs while copying Clear the error and then start copying again Error Message List Is there paper in the MP tray When copying using paper from the MP tray check whether enough paper is loaded in the MP tray before starting copying Press Device Settings select Paper Setup Select Tray Copy MP Tray and then c...

Page 736: ...problem with the following solutions contact your dealer For problems caused by an application contact the manufacturer of the application Unable to Print Network Connection Problems Wireless LAN Connection Problems USB Connection Problems 735 ...

Page 737: ...ng is disabled Whether there is a consistency with the machine s settings and the network connection environment check the settings of the interface that you are using on the operator panel Connecting This Machine to a Network There is a problem with the print function Check if the menu map can be printed Checking the Information of the Machine The power switch LED lamp quickly flashes at approxim...

Page 738: ...ing is complete Received invalid data is displayed on the display screen and the machine does not print Press Device Settings select Admin Setup Print Setup Print menu Printer Adjust Timeout Injob and then select a longer time The factory default setting is 40 seconds 737 ...

Page 739: ... machine cannot connect to a wired LAN and wireless LAN at the same time To connect to a wired network set the network connection to wired Connecting This Machine to a Network For Windows Cause Solution Reference The IP address is incorrect Check that the same IP address is set for the machine and the machine s port setting on the computer Check that the IP address is not duplicated by another dev...

Page 740: ...near a wireless access point We suggest that the distance between the machine and the access point be 30 m or less If there is metal aluminum sash or a reinforced concrete wall between the machine and wireless access points connections may be harder to be established Do not place any electric appliances that emit weak radio waves such as microwaves or digital cordless telephones close to the machi...

Page 741: ...740 ...

Page 742: ...n select AdminSetup Management Local Interface USB Menu USB Assignment Legacy Management The machine is offline Right click the OKI MC873 icon on the Devices and Printers folder and then select See print jobs if multiple drivers are installed select OKI MC873 In the dialog box select the Printer menu and then clear the check of Use Printer Offline Select the required driver type A switch buffer ex...

Page 743: ... cannot solve a problem with the following solutions contact your dealer Unable to Scan Unable to Send and Receive E Mail Unable to Save Files in a Network Folder Network Connection Problems Wireless LAN Connection Problems 742 ...

Page 744: ...the cable connections and then connect the cables properly Connecting This Machine to a Network Is there any damage to the cable Change the cable Is the network setting correct Set the network setting correctly Connecting This Machine to a Network Has any error occurred Follow the on screen instructions on the display screen of the machine Error Message List 743 ...

Page 745: ...asy Setup Is another job in progress Wait until the other job is complete Has any error occurred Follow the on screen instructions on the display screen of the machine Error Message List The network connection setting is incorrect This machine cannot connect to a wired LAN and wireless LAN at the same time To connect to a wired network set the network connection to wired To connect to a wireless n...

Page 746: ...745 ...

Page 747: ...oint to check Solution Reference Is the FTP CIFS setting correct Check the profile settings Before Using Scan To Shared Folder Has any error occurred Follow the on screen instructions on the display screen of the machine Error Message List 746 ...

Page 748: ...he network connection setting is incorrect This machine cannot connect to a wired LAN and wireless LAN at the same time To connect to a wired network set the network connection to wired Connecting This Machine to a Network For Windows Cause Solution Reference The IP address is incorrect Check that the same IP address is set for the machine and the machine s port setting on the computer Check that ...

Page 749: ...l this machine in a place with a good view and near a wireless access point We suggest that the distance between the machine and the access point be 30 m or less If there is metal aluminum sash or a reinforced concrete wall between the machine and wireless access points connections may be harder to be established Do not place any electric appliances that emit weak radio waves such as microwaves or...

Page 750: ...oblems Memo If you cannot solve a problem with the following solutions contact your dealer Unable to Send a Fax Unable to Receive a Fax Unable to Send or Received a Fax Other Problems Fax Fax Error Codes 749 ...

Page 751: ...a Document After dialing even if the START button is pressed the machine cannot send a fax Did you specify the appropriate dial type Specify the appropriate dial type for your region User Install Is the document set properly Set the document properly Setting a Document Did you dial the correct number Dial the correct number Is the recipient s line busy Wait until the line is opened and then try ag...

Page 752: ...Delete the documents stored in the Secure Receive Board Box by Fax Fcode Polling Setting Secure Reception 751 ...

Page 753: ...ed transmission Check whether paper jams or paper runs out Cancelling a Fax Transmission If Paper Jams Occur Print the documents received with the confidential transmission Delete the documents stored in the bulletin board box Delete the documents stored in the Secure Receive Printing a Document That is Received in the Confidential Box of This Machine Deleting Unnecessary Jobs from Memory Setting ...

Page 754: ...ymptom Point to check Solution Reference Unable to send or receive a fax Did you install an IP phone on the machine in a broadband environment Press Device Settings and then select Admin Setup User Install Super G3 OFF User Install 753 ...

Page 755: ... tray other than Plain or Recycled in Media Type Specify Plain or Recycled in Media Type for the paper type in the tray Setting a Print Method for When a Received Image Exceeds Paper Size Junk faxes are received Is Block Junk Fax set to OFF Press Device Settings AdminSetup Fax Sestup Other Settings Block Junk Fax Set Setting to Mode1 Block Junk Fax 754 ...

Page 756: ...was full 37 Polling Tx failed as there was no applicable Fcode box 38 Polling Tx was cancelled as the Fcode box was not accessible 39 Rx was cancelled as the Fcode box was not accessible 40 The destination machine did not respond Check the machine 41 Tx failed with the minimum speed Try again 43 There was no response from the destination machine Check the machine 45 There was no response from the ...

Page 757: ...7 The wrong signal was received Check the destination machine 69 The wrong signal was received Check the destination machine 6A There were pages which could not be received correctly 80 Error in myself 82 The start of communication in SuperG3 mode was not completed 83 The start of communication in SuperG3 mode was not completed 84 Error in myself 90 Too many characters 756 ...

Page 758: ... Fading Vertically Paper feeding direction Printed Images are Light White Spots and Lines Appear Dew Condensation Appears on Printed Paper Vertical Lines Appear Paper feeding direction Horizontal Lines and Spots Appear Periodically Paper feeding direction White Area on Paper is Lightly Stained The Periphery of Characters is Smudged The Entire Paper Area is Lightly Stained When Printing on Envelope...

Page 759: ...ppear Dirt is Printed The Entire Page is Printed Black Nothing is Printed White Patches Appear The Entire Page is Dirty The Peripheral Area of the Page is Dirty The Printed Image is Skewed Color of the printed image is not what you expect Solid printing of CMY 100 is too light 758 ...

Page 760: ...the Toner Cartridge The lightproof film of the image drum is dirty Wipe the lightproof film with a soft tissue paper The image drum is not installed properly Install the image drum properly Replacing the Image Drum The ADF document glass is dirty Clean the ADF document glass Cleaning the Document Glass Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers and Document Holding Rollers There may be foreign objects in ...

Page 761: ... dirty Wipe the LED head with a soft tissue paper Cleaning the LED Head The toner is low If Toner Low or Toner Empty Replace with new Toner Cartridge appears replace the toner cartridge Replacing the Toner Cartridge The paper is unsuitable Use recommended paper Loading Paper 760 ...

Page 762: ...unsuitable Use recommended paper Loading Paper The paper is unsuitable The settings of the media type and weight are incorrect Press Device Settings select Paper Setup the paper tray you are using and then select the proper values for Media Type and Media Weight Or select a thicker values for Media Weight Loading Paper Recycled paper is used Press Device Settings and then select Paper Setup the pa...

Page 763: ...White Spots and Lines Appear Cause Solution Reference The paper is damp or dry Use paper stored under proper temperature and humidity conditions Loading Paper 762 ...

Page 764: ...he paper is damp Use paper stored under proper temperature and humidity conditions Loading Paper The machine is printing when the temperature and humidity conditions are high Use the machine under proper temperature and humidity conditions Installation Requirements 763 ...

Page 765: ...ace the toner cartridge Replacing the Toner Cartridge The document glass and document feed roller of the ADF are dirty Clean the document glass and document feed roller Cleaning the Document Glass Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers and Document Holding Rollers The image drum is damaged Replace the image drum Replacing the Image Drum 764 ...

Page 766: ...um if it is damaged Replacing the Image Drum If the intervals of lines or spots are approximately 40 mm 1 6 inches there may be foreign objects in the image drum Open and close the output tray and then print again The image drum has been exposed to light Place the image drum back into the machine and then do not use for a few hours If the problem persists replace the image drum Replacing the Image...

Page 767: ...charge Use paper stored under proper temperature and humidity conditions Loading Paper The paper is too thick Use thinner paper Loading Paper The toner is low If Toner Low or Toner Empty Replace with new Toner Cartridge appears replace the toner cartridge Replacing the Toner Cartridge 766 ...

Page 768: ...use Solution Reference The LED head is dirty Wipe the LED head with a soft tissue paper Cleaning the LED Head The paper is unsuitable Use recommended paper Loading Paper The paper is damp Replace the damp paper with new paper Loading Paper 767 ...

Page 769: ...ea is Lightly Stained When Printing on Envelopes or Coated Paper Cause Solution Reference The toner may stick to the whole area of the envelope or coated paper This is not a malfunction Coated paper is not recommended 768 ...

Page 770: ... Device Settings select Paper Setup the paper tray you are using and then select the proper values for Media Weight Or select a thicker value for Media Weight Loading Paper Recycled paper is used Press Device Settings select Paper Setup the paper tray you are using and then select a thicker value for Media Weight Loading Paper 769 ...

Page 771: ...e The settings of the media type and weight are incorrect Press Device Settings select Paper Setup the paper tray you are using and then select the proper value for Media Weight Or select a thicker value for Media Weight Loading Paper 770 ...

Page 772: ...pots are approximately 94 mm 3 7 inches the green tube of the image drum is damaged or dirty Lightly wipe the image drum with a soft tissue paper Replace the image drum if it is damaged Replacing the Image Drum The document glass or document holding pad is dirty Clean the document glass and document holding pad Cleaning the Document Glass 771 ...

Page 773: ...is damp Replace the damp paper with new paper Loading Paper The paper is unsuitable Use recommended paper Loading Paper The document glass or document holding pad is dirty Clean the document glass and document holding pad Cleaning the Document Glass 772 ...

Page 774: ...The Entire Page is Printed Black Cause Solution Reference A malfunction may occur in the machine Contact your dealer 773 ...

Page 775: ...o or more sheets of paper are fed at the same time Fan the paper well and load the paper again Loading Paper The document is set upside down Set the document properly Setting a Document A malfunction may occur in the machine Contact your dealer 774 ...

Page 776: ...lution Reference The paper is damp Replace the damp paper with new paper Loading Paper The paper is unsuitable Use recommended paper Loading Paper The document glass is dirty Clean the document glass Cleaning the Document Glass 775 ...

Page 777: ...ing the Document Glass The image on the back side of a duplex document is printed If the duplex document is thin the image on the back side may be printed Lighten the density Change Show Through Removal setting or lighten the density Adjusting the Density Density Removing Show Through Show Through Removal 776 ...

Page 778: ...ged or Reduced Copies Zoom Enlarging or Reducing to Fit the Specified Paper Size Setting a Print Method for When a Received Image Exceeds Paper Size The document orientation is different from the paper orientation Set the document orientation to suit paper Changing the Document Orientation Direction The document is not reduced at the rate that suits the paper size Reduce the document at the rate t...

Page 779: ...properly Setting a Document An unsuitable document is set in the ADF Set a suitable document in the ADF Setting a Document There may be foreign objects on the ADF document glass Clean the ADF document glass Cleaning the Document Glass Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers and Document Holding Rollers 778 ...

Page 780: ... for Black Finish About Screens and Functions of Each Printer Driver The color adjustment has been modified Do color matching from the printer driver Color Matching Office Color Color Matching Graphic Pro The color balance is out of adjustment Press Device Settings Admin Setup Color Setup and adjust density or color balance Correcting Density Manually Adjusting Color Balance Density Color registra...

Page 781: ...Solid printing of CMY 100 is too light Cause Solution Reference CMY100 Density is set to Disable Press Device Settings Admin Setup Color Setup CMY100 Density and then select Enable 780 ...

Page 782: ...Problems about Software Problems on Configuration Tool Problems on a Web Browser Problems on Other Software About Restrictions on Each OS 781 ...

Page 783: ...m Unlock the used item before editing Cannot edit at all The items are locked because this machine is being set from another computer Wait until setting from another computer is complete Alternatively interrupt setting from another computer before editing Cannot set the edits to this machine Editing is timed out Set a longer time out period for this machine before editing Press Device Settings sel...

Page 784: ... because other functions use them Unlock the used item before editing Cannot edit at all The items are locked because this machine is being set from another computer Wait until setting from another computer is complete Alternatively interrupt setting from another computer before editing Cannot set the edits to this machine Editing is timed out Set a longer time out period for this machine before e...

Page 785: ...e used for the auto delivery settings of the copy source device these settings also need to be copied at the same time To copy only the auto delivery settings delete the e mail speed dial or other settings from the copy source device before performing cloning Alert Info tab Symptom Cause Solution Reference Cannot enable an alert on the Alert Info Detect and notify of device events screen Save the ...

Page 786: ...785 ...

Page 787: ... to check Solution Unable to connect with the machine A LAN cable is unplugged Check that the cable is plugged into the machine and computer properly The IP address is incorrect Check the IP address of the machine and enter it correctly 786 ...

Page 788: ...ver correctly Installing a Driver and Software to a Computer When a printer driver is already installed another printer driver cannot be installed Perform Custom Install by following the procedure described in the reference Installing a Driver and Software to a Computer The Unable to install printer driver error message is displayed Use Plug and Play Follow the procedure below 1 Check that the mac...

Page 789: ...m Capability Assistant dialog box is displayed If the Program Capability Assistant dialog box is displayed after installation including if you stop installation before it is complete be sure to click This program installed Color Correct Utility The User Account Control dialog box is displayed When you start an installer or utility the User Account Control dialog may be displayed Click Yes or Conti...

Page 790: ...aller or utility the User Account Control dialog may be displayed Click Yes or Continue to run the installer or utility as the administrator If you click No the installer or utility does not start Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 Notes for Windows Firewall On Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 the Windows firewall function is enhanced The following restrictions may apply to printer drivers and u...

Page 791: ...790 ...

Page 792: ...Problems on the Machine or Paper Problems on the Machine Problems on Document and Paper If a Power Failure Occurs 791 ...

Page 793: ...er The power switch LED lamp lights the POWER SAVE button is turned on and nothing is displayed on the operation panel The screen saver screen is displayed on the operator panel Touch the operation panel The output tray and front cover cannot be closed The belt unit and image drams are not properly installed Remove the four image drams and reinstall the belt unit If the blue locks on the both side...

Page 794: ...ensation wait a while until the condensation disappears Installation Requirements Nothing is displayed on the display screen The machine is in Sleep mode or Deep Sleep mode Check the POWER SAVE button flashes and then start the machine by pressing the POWER SAVE button Saving Power Consumption with the Power Save Function Print data is not sent A LAN cable or USB cable is damaged Connect a new cab...

Page 795: ...machine is left turned off for a long time or turn the machine on and off every time you use the machine The battery may reach its lifetime Contact your dealer Free space in Memory is insufficient The print data is complicated Simplify the print data All pages are not printed The WSD port is used Change the print port to Standard TCP IP Port Printing is slow Printing process is also processed in t...

Page 796: ...Power Off and then disable the function with the Power Save Function The web page does not open The IP address is incorrect Check the IP address to the machine and then enter proper value Open the Web Page of This Machine The LAN cable is disconnected Make sure that the LAN cable is securely connected Connecting This Machine to a Network 795 ...

Page 797: ...he machine is inclined Place the machine on a flat surface The paper is too light or too heavy The paper is too light or too heavy Use the appropriate paper for the machine Loading Paper The paper is damp or has a static charge Use paper stored under proper temperature and humidity conditions Loading Paper The paper is wrinkled folded or curled Use the appropriate paper for the machine Fix the cur...

Page 798: ...ne Paper is not fed from Tray 2 3 4 optional Tray 2 3 4 is not set with the printer driver Set Tray 2 3 4 with the printer driver Installing the Additional Tray Unit s to the Machine Even after the jammed paper was removed the machine does not work Open and close the output tray Paper is curled Paper is creased The paper is damp or has a static charge Use paper stored under proper temperature and ...

Page 799: ...inting on envelopes The paper is damp Use paper stored under proper temperature and humidity conditions Loading Paper The machine is printing when the temperature and humidity conditions are high Set High Humid Mode of User Install to ON on Admin Setup User Install If you cannot solve a problem with the above solutions Load the envelope with the flap for gluing on the printer side and then set the...

Page 800: ...data again Set the document and then specify the destination again to start the transmission During a reception The reception stops halfway If the machine received one or more pages the erased report is printed after the power is restored A received image is not printed Copying or printing a list Printing stops halfway When the power is restored start the print job again Idle You cannot start anot...

Page 801: ...communication Fcode bulletin board communication Time when communication started Number of received pages Memo If a fax is received with the manual reception Fcode polling reception or Fcode confidential reception its reception type is also printed 800 ...

Page 802: ...ings AdminSetup Management Local Interface USB Menu USB Assignment Select IPP Unable to print Is the machine turned on Turn the machine on If the machine is turned on turn it off and then back on and then check whether the problem is solved Turning the Machine On or Off Is the machine connected to the same network as the iOS device Check that the machine is displayed on the print screen of the iOS...

Page 803: ... Settings and check the status of AirPrint When Disable is displayed AirPrint is not available Is an error displayed Check the error message or the STATUS button Error Message List If the STATUS Button on the Operator Panel Lights Up or Flashes 802 ...

Page 804: ...k administrator Even after the machine was deleted from Google Cloud Print the registration information remains on the management screen Did you delete the registration information with the machine connected to a network Delete the machine on the management screen of Google Cloud Print Checking That Deletion is Complete Even after the machine was deleted from Google Cloud Print the registration in...

Page 805: ... server setting of the machine Checking Google Cloud Print Registrations xxxxxx12 Failed to connect to the HTTP server The connection cannot be established due to your network environment Check with your network administrator xxxxxx13 An HTTP server connection error The connection cannot be established due to your network environment Check with your network administrator xxxxxx14 An error with the...

Page 806: ... to connect to the proxy server Check the proxy server setting of the machine If the problem cannot be solved check with your network administrator Checking Google Cloud Print Registrations xxxxxx86 A connection error with the proxy server Check that the XMPP 5222 port is opened If the problem cannot be solved check with your network administrator xxxxxx87 An authentication error of the proxy serv...

Page 807: ...ge and or an error code a 3 digit number is displayed on the operator panel In such a case the STATUS button lights up or flashes If you are not sure how to solve a problem enter the error message or error code into Error Message List and then check the error cause and its solution Error Message List 806 ...

Page 808: ...off and then back on If the same error occurs contact your dealer Offline Mode The machine is offline Press the Online button to set it to Online Data present Data remains unprinted Deleting data The job was cancelled or user is unauthorized Warming up The machine is adjusting the temperature of the fuser unit Wait for a while Preparing Color registration and density are being adjusted Wait for a ...

Page 809: ...e a toner cartridge that matches your machine Y Non Recommended Toner An optimum Y Yellow toner cartridge is not installed Use a toner cartridge that matches your machine K Non Recommended Toner An optimum K Black toner cartridge is not installed Use a toner cartridge that matches your machine Error Postscript A postscript error has occurred Image Drum Near Life The image dram indicated on the scr...

Page 810: ...the screen is not installed Install the toner cartridge C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black Image Drum Life Please install new Image Drum Unit The image dram indicated on the screen reaches its lifetime Replace the image drum with a new one C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black TRAY is empty No paper is loaded in the tray Load paper File System is full Memory in the file system is full...

Page 811: ... exceeded Files whose authentication print data storage period expired were automatically deleted Disk Read Write Error An error has occurred in the file system Press Close Flash Error An error has occurred when firmware was being updated Contact the administrator Invalid print data received Invalid print data or PC fax data was received To erase the message press Close If you performed authentica...

Page 812: ...n the machine are being updated Wait for a while Wait a moment Message Data writing Messages to be displayed on the machine are being updated Wait for a while Restart the machine Writing message data has been complete Messages to be displayed on the machine are now updated Turn the machine off and then back on Wait for a while Please check data Message Data Write Error Updating messages to be disp...

Page 813: ... indicated cartridge ran out of toner Opening and closing the front cover can resume printing for a while but it may damage the image dram Replace the toner cartridge with a new one as soon as possible C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black Incompatible C Toner Error 552 556 616 622 The installed C Cyan blue toner cartridge is not optimum We recommend using an optimum toner cartridge Incompati...

Page 814: ...er size and direction set for the paper size dial If the setting made by the paper size dial is wrong cancel printing first set the paper size dial and then print again Make sure that the cassette does not feed multiple sheets of paper at a time after starting printing If it happens remove paper and then load paper correctly Paper jam has occurred Open the front cover and remove the paper Error 39...

Page 815: ...the cover can resume printing for a while Replace with a new one as soon as possible however C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black Image Drum Life Please install new Image Drum Unit Error 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 The image dram indicated on the screen reaches its lifetime Replace the image drum with a new one C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black Image Drum Life Please install new...

Page 816: ...ake sure that the lever on the toner cartridge is fully turned and the protective tape is removed C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black Image Drum not properly installed Check Image Drum Error 340 341 342 343 The indicated image dram is not installed correctly Remove and re install the image dram C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black The Fuser Unit is not installed correctly Reset Fuser ...

Page 817: ...and remove jammed paper Scanner lamp error check the lamp Light volume of the scanner is low Contact your dealer Power OFF ON Carriage Error 1 An error has occurred on the carriage of the scanner Turn the machine off and then back on If the same error occurs contact your dealer USB Memory Full Scan To USB Memory was cancelled because the USB Memory is full Check the free space in the USB Memory Wr...

Page 818: ...on To erase the message press Close E mail Transmission Error An error such as a malfunction of the server or disconnection of a network cable has occurred while performing Scan To E mail Check the network connection To erase the message press Close Please check SMTP settings Cannot connect to the SMTP server Check the network settings Please check POP3 settings Cannot connect to the POP3 server C...

Page 819: ...ailed Connecting to the directory of the FTP server failed Check the server settings Changing data Transfer Type failed File transmission failed because the file transfer type was not accepted by the FTP server Change the FTP transfer type to binary File writing failed Files sent using Scan To shared folder could not be written Check the access rights for the shared folder FTP destination Full Mem...

Page 820: ...zed user Contact your administrator for color printing Access Limitation Error Data was deleted due to the color printing limitation A color print job was deleted due to an unauthorized user Contact your administrator for color printing Restricted access error Data deleted due to printing restrictions A print job was deleted due to an unauthorized user Contact your administrator for printing Incom...

Page 821: ...counting log buffer is almost full Acquire the log and free the buffer Accounting Log Writing Error An accounting log writing error has occurred To erase the message press Close Job Log Database Error A data base access error has occurred while writing or reading the job log Turning the machine off and on may resolve the problem To erase the message press Close Accounting Log Buffer Full Delete ol...

Page 822: ... computer failed when performing Scan to Computer Check the settings on the computer Deleting data This machine ran out of color toner Color print data is being deleted Error PDF The PDF file is damaged This PDF file is password protected This PDF file is password protected Enter a password to print Valid password required to print document This PDF needs authentication Enter a password to print N...

Page 823: ... while printing Place the rear output tray in the correct position and then open and close the output tray Toner empty Replace with new Toner Cartridge The indicated cartridge ran out of toner Replace the empty toner cartridge with a new one Wait Timeout in menu is disabled Printing is disabled except by USB Clear page buffer and enable time out in menu Wait Timeout is disabled Insufficient Memory...

Page 824: ...ng removed from the Google Cloud Print service Wait for a while Caution unknown Consumable detected Go to User Manual Trouble Shooting to restore operation Use of consumables that are not specified by OKI Data may deteriorate printing quality and result in the printer not functioning to its capabilities Charges for services for problems caused by the use of consumables that are not specified by OK...

Page 825: ...ted with that of another device Check the IP addresses and then assign another IP address Incompatible COLOR Image Drum Error 984 685 686 687 690 691 692 693 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 Non optimum image dram is installed C Cyan blue M Magenta red Y Yellow K Black C Image Drum Not Installed Error 696 Cyan blue image dram is not installed Install the image dram M Image Drum Not Installed Error ...

Page 826: ...se button to remove this dialog MP tray setting is set to Do Not Use Change the MP tray setting Output Paper Full Remove the paper on TRAY Error 480 485 Paper in the output tray is full Remove the handout Changing Language Panel operation is disabled Display language is being changed Wait for a while Language Change Failed Error num CODE Switching display languages failed Press the power button to...

Page 827: ...balance please contact the device administr To cancel the print job select Cancel The number of print jobs excesses the limit No more print jobs are authorized Contact your administrator 826 ...

Page 828: ...827 ...

Page 829: ... Document Setting Output Tray Saving Power Consumption with the Power Save Function Reducing Power Consumption by Automatically Turning the Machine Off Adjusting Volume Simultaneous Operation Multitasking Checking the Information of the Machine Using the Offline Stapler Easy Setup Profile Configure One Touch Button JOB MACRO 828 ...

Page 830: ...ach component Front View Rear View Inside of the machine Front View No Name 1 Auto document feeder ADF cover 2 Document tray 3 Scanner unit 4 Document glass cover 5 Operator panel Basic Operations on the Operator Panel 6 USB port 7 Multipurpose MP tray 829 ...

Page 831: ... Front cover open lever 14 Tray 1 15 Paper size dial 16 Offline stapler Rear View No Name 17 Telephone connector for connecting an external telephone 18 LINE connector 19 Output tray cover 20 Rear output tray 21 Duplex unit 22 Power connector 23 Wireless LAN module cover 24 Network interface connector 830 ...

Page 832: ...or Inside of the machine No Name 26 LED head 27 Fuser 28 Toner cartridge Image drum C cyan 29 Toner cartridge Image drum M magenta 30 Toner cartridge Image drum Y yellow 31 Toner cartridge Image drum K black 32 Open button 831 ...

Page 833: ...Basic Operations on the Operator Panel Names and Functions Name and Functions on the Touch Panel How to Customize the Touch Panel Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Angle Entering Characters 832 ...

Page 834: ...u can check the remaining amount of consumables and fax communication status 9 CLEAR button Executes the following operations by pressing or pressing and holding this key according to the entry item Minimizes a setting value Enters zero in a setting value Clears the entry Clears the selected item 10 START button Starts copying scanning faxing or printing from USB Memory 11 STOP button Cancels copy...

Page 835: ...perator panel use care not to let your hands be caught between this machine and the operator panel Injury may result Do not press the touch panel hard or poke it with a pointed object It may damage the touch panel and cause malfunction 834 ...

Page 836: ... Stationary button area Displays buttons that appear on the screen at all times Displays the following items Job Macro Function Settings Device Settings RESET Logout Antenna mark appears when the wireless LAN is enabled Only available buttons are displayed on the selected menu 2 Title and operation guide area Displays the title of the current screen and provides guide for possible operations 3 Mai...

Page 837: ...menu 2 Title and operation guide area Displays the title of the current screen and provides guide for possible operations 3 Tab labels Displays labels for tabs Press a label to switch between tabs If any setting is changed from its default setting is displayed 4 Main area Displays a preview of copy output that will be produced with the current settings The current setting is displayed on each butt...

Page 838: ...unctions of Screen Items for Copy Descriptions of Screens for Scan Names and Functions of Screen Items for Print Names and Functions of Screen Items for Fax Names and Functions of Screen Items for Internet Fax 837 ...

Page 839: ...mes and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Configure Home Screen 5 Press the button whose setting you want to change The shortcut button setting screen is displayed 6 Operate the touch panel according to the changes you want to make Item Description 1 Layout preview...

Page 840: ...ter Remote Scan TWAIN Remote Scan WSD Print Stored Job Encrypted Job Print From USB Memory Job Macro Google Cloud Print Troubleshooting indicates the factory default setting Setting a Shortcut Button of Each Function The number of shortcut buttons that can be set varies depending on the function 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the a...

Page 841: ...anner Setup Shared Folder Setup Configure Shortcuts Fax Sending Press Fax Setup Configure Shortcuts Internet Fax Sending Press Internet Fax Setup Configure Shortcuts Scanning to Fax Server Press FaxServer Function Configure Shortcuts 5 Press the button whose setting you want to change 6 Select a function to register Memo Each shortcut button registered cannot be deleted It can be replaced by a dif...

Page 842: ...everal times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press System Setup 6 Press or several times and press Panel Brightness During Operating or Panel Brightness While Power Save 7 Enter value and press OK Available values are f...

Page 843: ...Adjusting Angle You can change the angle of the operator panel 1 Hold the both sides of the touch panel and adjust to a desired angle 842 ...

Page 844: ... the maximum number of characters that can be entered Indicates the maximum number of characters that can be entered and the number of entered characters 3 Back Space Deletes a character just before the cursor 4 Character panel Enters characters The character type switches depending on the entry mode 5 Return button Puts a line break This button appears when entering body text of an E mail 6 Left ...

Page 845: ... or Symbol Memo RU may be shown in case of Russian and EL in case of Greek In case of other languages only Alpha and Symbol may be shown Switching the Entry Mode Uppercase Lowercase 1 Press the button to switch between the uppercase and lowercase characters Deleting an Entered Character 1 Use the back space tentative name button on the touch panel or the CLEAR button The character before the curso...

Page 846: ...impossible to enter the alphabet Please enter the alphabet from the touch panel Deleting an Entered Character To delete the character to the left of the cursor press the CLEAR button To clear characters you entered in a row press and hold the CLEAR button 845 ...

Page 847: ...rd from the outlet before disconnecting the ground wire Be sure to plug or unplug the power cord by holding its power plug Securely plug the power cord into the outlet Do not plug or unplug the power cord with wet hands Install the power cord in a location where users cannot step on it and do not place any object on the power cord Do not bundle or tie the power cord Do not use a damaged power cord...

Page 848: ... this machine off or unplug the power cord during printing If you do not use this machine for an extended period of time due to holidays trips or other reasons unplug the power cord Do not use the power cord included in this machine for other products Turning the Machine On Turning the Machine Off 847 ...

Page 849: ...nt glass or in the ADF and the ADF cover is closed 4 Press the power switch for approximately a second When the machine is turned on the power switch LED lamp is lit When the machine is turned on for the first time after the wireless LAN board is attached the wireless setting screen is displayed If you select Yes the wireless LAN setting is performed 848 ...

Page 850: ...rmed The wireless setting screen is not displayed any more If you select No the wireless LAN setting is not performed The wireless setting screen is displayed every time you turn the machine on 5 The machine enters standby status and then the home screen is displayed 849 ...

Page 851: ...power switch for approximately a second The Shutdown in progress Please wait The machine turns off automatically message is displayed and the power switch LED lamp flashes at approximately one second intervals After a while the machine automatically turns off and the power switch LED lamp goes out What You Should Do If You Do Not Use This Machine for an Extended Period of Time If you do not use th...

Page 852: ...This machine does not have functional failures if the power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time four weeks or more 851 ...

Page 853: ...uch as material weight or paper surface finishing Use digital photo print paper If you print on paper that is not recommended by Oki Data check the print quality and the movement of the paper thoroughly in advance to ensure that there are no problems Paper type Paper type and paper size mm The value enclosed with brackets is indicated in inches Paper weight Plain paper A3 297 x 420 64 to 256 g m2 ...

Page 854: ...38 Label A4 210 x 297 0 1 to 0 2 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 215 9 x 279 4 Partly printing paper Subject to plain paper 64 to 256 g m2 17 to 68 lb Color paper Subject to plain paper 64 to 256 g m2 17 to 68 lb Recommended paper The machine supports a variety of print media including a range of paper weights and sizes This section describes how to choose and use media To obtain the best performance use 75 to...

Page 855: ...ow Directly on the floor Where paper is exposed to direct sunlight Near the inside of an exterior wall On an uneven surface Where static electricity may be generated Where temperature excessively rises high and temperature rapidly changes Near this machine an air conditioner a heater or duct Note Do not unwrap paper until just before you use Do not leave paper unwrapped for a long period Doing so ...

Page 856: ...inches Legal 13 5 inches Legal 14 inches Executive 8 5 SQ 8 5 x 8 5 inches Folio 210 x 330 mm 8K 270 x 390 mm 8K 273 x 394 mm 8K 260 x 368 mm 16K 184 x 260 mm 16K 195 x 270 mm 16K 197 x 273 mm Custom 535 sheets if paper weight is 80 g m2 Light 64 to 82 g m2 Medium Light 83 to 90 g m2 Medium 91 to 105 g m2 Heavy 106 to 128 g m2 Ultra Heavy 1 129 to 188 g m2 Note Weight of paper loaded on an additio...

Page 857: ...s 80 g m2 10 sheets envelopes Light 64 to 82 g m2 Medium Light 83 to 90 g m2 Medium 91 to 105 g m2 Heavy 106 to 128 g m2 Ultra Heavy1 129 to 188 g m2 Ultra Heavy2 189 to 220 g m2 Ultra Heavy3 221 to 256 g m2 Paper cannot be used for duplex printing Loading Paper Paper can be loaded in the following three trays Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 and MP tray Load envelopes or labels in the MP tray Loading in Tray...

Page 858: ... the paper guide to the width of paper to be loaded 4 Slide the paper stopper to the length of paper to be loaded When loading the A6 size paper move the paper stopper 2 forward and remove it once then install it on the metal part Slide the paper support in the direction of the arrow and fix it 857 ...

Page 859: ...r 6 Load paper with the print side face down Note Do not load paper above the mark on the paper guide 7 Secure the loaded paper with the paper guide 8 Check if a size of loaded paper matches the setting of paper size dial 9 Push the paper cassette until it stops 858 ...

Page 860: ...el 11 Press Paper Setup 12 Press the tray in which paper is loaded 13 Set Paper Size Media Type and Media Weight 14 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Loading in the MP Tray The following procedure describes how to load paper in the MP tray 1 Open the MP tray forward by inserting your fingers into the front recesses 2 Pull out the paper support by holding the center part of it 859 ...

Page 861: ...3 Open the sub support 4 Open the paper set cover 5 Adjust the manual feeding paper guide to the width of paper to be loaded 860 ...

Page 862: ...ouches the paper feed entrance Note Do not load paper above the mark 7 Close the paper set cover Note When a printer is in the power saving mode press the POWER SAVE button to restore from the mode 8 Set Paper Size Media Type and Media Weight on the paper 861 ...

Page 863: ...ign edges of both bundles of paper and then load them Do not insert objects other than paper in the MP tray Loading Envelopes This section describes how to load envelopes in the MP tray 1 Open the MP tray forward by inserting your fingers into the front recesses 2 Pull out the paper support by holding the center part of it 3 Open the sub support 862 ...

Page 864: ... cover 5 Adjust the manual feeding paper guide to the width of an envelope to be loaded 6 Load an envelope with the print side up until its edge touches the paper feed entrance Note Do not load envelopes above the mark 863 ...

Page 865: ... If you are using envelopes with the flap for gluing on the long edge Com 10 DL C5 load them with the flap folded so that the flap is on the left side when fed 7 Close the document set cover 8 Open the rear output tray 864 ...

Page 866: ...865 ...

Page 867: ...s Paper weight 60 to 120 g m2 16 to 32 lb Document glass Scannable size A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Tabloid Letter Letter Legal 13 13 5 14 Executive Statement Statement Folio 8 5 SQ Document thickness Up to 20 mm Memo Duplex scan is not available for A5 A6 B5 Statement Note For documents on which adhesives ink or correction fluid is used make sure that they have completely dried before setting Abou...

Page 868: ...Texts or images within the 2 mm area from the edges of standard paper cannot be scanned with the copy function Symbols Indicating Document Orientation This symbol indicates that the document is placed in the vertical orientation from the front of this machine For the ADF place the document in such a way as to feed the long edge first This symbol indicates that the document is placed in the horizon...

Page 869: ...Edge on Left set the document so that its top edge is pulled into the ADF first 2 Align the document guide to the document width Note If ADF paper feed problems often occur reduce the number of document pages to set Documents of up to 100 sheets 80 g m2 and 10 mm high can be loaded regardless of the size For curled documents make sure that the document guides fit to the document width 868 ...

Page 870: ...gal13 Legal13 5 and Legal14 which is specified from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Default Settings Auto detect Scan Size Legal Size is set as Scan Size Setting on the Document Glass 1 Open the document glass cover 2 Set a document face down on the document glass If a document is portrait align its top edge with the upper left corner of the glass If a document is landscape align its rig...

Page 871: ...nt Orientation Direction Memo The machine automatically detects the following document sizes Series Detectable sizes AB A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Folio Letter Tabloid Letter Letter Legal14 Executive Statement If Legal14 is detected in the Letter series the value between Legal13 Legal13 5 and Legal14 which is specified from Device Settings Admin Setup Scanner Setup Default Settings Auto detect Sca...

Page 872: ...Note When the document is set on the document glass the document size is detected after the document glass cover is closed Be sure to close the document glass cover 871 ...

Page 873: ... Plain paper Recycled paper 250 sheets 80 g m2 Upper output tray Only for MC873 Series Plain paper Recycled paper 100 sheets 80 g m2 Rear output tray Plain paper Recycled paper Envelope 3x5inch 4x6inch 5x7inch Label 100 sheets 80 g m2 10 sheets thick paper and envelopes Note Do not open or close the Rear output tray during printing Paper jams may result Upper Output Tray Output Tray Use these outp...

Page 874: ...Output Tray Use rear output tray when printing on envelopes labels or long paper Paper is output with the printed side up Plain paper is also available for this output tray 1 Open the rear output tray F on the rear side of the machine 2 Unfold the paper support 3 Open the sub support 873 ...

Page 875: ...874 ...

Page 876: ...ver Sleep mode After a certain period of time passes 2 A certain function 3 is enabled The screen on the operator panel turns off The POWER SAVE button flashes in green every 3 seconds Press the POWER SAVE button Print data a fax or other data is received Set the document in the ADF Open or close the document glass cover Deep Sleep mode After a certain period of time passes 2 A certain function 3 ...

Page 877: ...ng Power Save mode 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press Power Save 876 ...

Page 878: ...6 Press Power Save Time 7 Select transition time The factory default setting is 1 minute 877 ...

Page 879: ...r devices this machine returns to standby status Also when the document is set in the ADF or the document glass cover is opened closed this machine returns to the standby status You can register Power Save mode in the following three ways Using the Web Page of This Machine from a Computer This section describes how to set Power Save mode from the Web page You must log in as the administrator to se...

Page 880: ...cking or Changing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Click Admin Setup 4 Click Management Power Save 5 Select the transition time from Power Save Time and then click Submit Available transition time settings 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes indicates the factory default setting 879 ...

Page 881: ...Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Click the Device Setting tab 4 Click Menu settings 5 Click Display administrator settings 6 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 7 Click in order of Admin Setup Management Power Save 8 Select the transition time from Power Save Time and then click Save to device Available transition time settings 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 ...

Page 882: ...s Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press Power Save 6 Press Power Save Time 7 Select transition time 881 ...

Page 883: ...xiting Sleep Mode or Deep Sleep Mode to Standby Mode To exit Sleep mode to standby status press the POWER SAVE button Memo When this machine receives data from a computer or other devices this machine returns to standby status Also when the document is set in the ADF or the document glass cover is opened closed this machine returns to the standby status You can register Sleep mode in the following...

Page 884: ...ng or Changing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Click Admin Setup 4 Click Management Power Save 5 Select the transition time from Sleep Time and then click Submit Available transition time settings 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes indicates the factory default setting Topics About Restrictions i...

Page 885: ... Device Setting tab 4 Click Menu settings 5 Click Display administrator settings 6 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 7 Click in order of Admin Setup Management Power Save 8 Select the transition time from Sleep Time and then click Save to device Available transition time settings 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes indicates...

Page 886: ...Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press Power Save 6 Press Sleep Time 7 Select transition time 885 ...

Page 887: ...o enter Sleep mode or Deep Sleep mode from Power Save mode elapses and the connection is disconnected the machine enters Sleep mode E mail reception is enabled Wireless LAN is enabled Google Cloud Print is enabled LLTD is enabled HUB Link Status is 1000BASE T IPv6 Global Address is assigned Access Control in the Access Control settings is enabled and Local IC Card or LDAP IC Card in the Authentica...

Page 888: ...ed in the WINS server being deleted 2 The elapse time in Deep Sleep mode is not included in the intervals of the e mail alert notification time and the intervals of the NTP server update time The machine automatically enters Sleep mode from Deep Sleep mode In a network environment where a large number of packets are sent the machine automatically exits Deep Sleep mode to Sleep mode and responds Al...

Page 889: ... Power Off and turns off To use the machine again turn the machine on About the Auto Power Off Function Setting Items This section describes three setting items that decide the Auto Power Off operation Setting Auto Power Off This section describes how to set the transition time to enter Auto Power Off To set this setting the administrator password is required 888 ...

Page 890: ... A LAN cable is connected to the network interface connector A telephone cable is connected to the LINE connector Wireless LAN is enabled Disable The Auto Power Off function is disabled The machine does not automatically turn off Note If an error has occurred the machine does not automatically turn off If a delayed transmission is reserved the machine does not automatically turn off If a fax trans...

Page 891: ...st enter the administrator password to set this setting Using Configuration Tool Windows Only This section describes how to set Auto Power Off from Configuration Tool You must enter the administrator password to set this setting Using the Operator Panel This section describes how to set Auto Power Off from the operator panel of this machine You must enter the administrator password to set this set...

Page 892: ...r Install Power Setup 5 Select Auto Power Off and then click Submit Available value settings Enable Auto Config Disable indicates the factory default setting Setting the Transition Time 1 Open the Web page of this machine How to log in to the Web page Checking or Changing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Click Admin Setup 4 Click Management Power Save 5 ...

Page 893: ...892 ...

Page 894: ...ne from Registered Device Table 3 Click the Device Setting tab 4 Click Menu settings 5 Click Display administrator settings 6 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 7 Click in order of Admin Setup Management Power Save 8 Select the transition time from Auto Power Off Time and then click Save to device Available transition time settings 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 4 hours 8 hours 12 hours 18...

Page 895: ...s and press User Install 5 Press Power Setup 6 Press Auto Power Off 7 Select the value Available value settings Enable Auto Config Disable indicates the factory default setting Setting the Transition Time 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and passw...

Page 896: ...895 ...

Page 897: ...e key touch tone volume of the operator panel Adjusting the Key Touch Tone Volume on the Operator Panel 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press Sound Con...

Page 898: ...anagement 5 Press Sound Control 6 Press Copy Buzzer Volume 7 Select a volume level Adjusting Fax Buzzer Volume 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press So...

Page 899: ...s Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press Sound Control 6 Press JAM Buzzer Volume 7 Select a volume level 898 ...

Page 900: ...ory full simultaneous operation may not be accepted Available Not available First task Second task Copy Fax transmission Fax reception Scan To Shared Folder Scan To E mail Scan To USB Memory Printing from a computer Copy 2 2 2 Fax transmission 1 Fax reception 2 1 2 Scan To Shared Folder Scan To E Mail Except for E mail Scan To USB Memory Printing from a computer 2 2 2 1 If the first task is sendin...

Page 901: ...up Management System Setup Allow All Reports To Print is set to Disable log in as the administrator to print the following reports Scan To Log Speed Dial List Group List Fax Log Address Book Item Description Configuration Prints detailed settings of this machine System File List Prints a list of job files Demo Page Prints a demo page Error Log Prints an error log Scan To Log Prints the results of ...

Page 902: ...Rx Log Report Prints Tx Rx report for communications within 24 hours Fcode Box List Prints the list of Fcode boxes Block Junk Fax Prints the address list for Block Junk Fax E mail Internet Fax Journal Report Prints the transmission and reception results of the latest 50 Internet Fax Scan To E mail and e mail attachment files Address Book Prints the registered address list Print PCL Font List Print...

Page 903: ...Using the Offline Stapler 1 Insert paper deeply into the stapler Paper is automatically stapled 2 Remove paper 902 ...

Page 904: ... on the operator panel Date Time Setting Time Zone Sets the GMT time zone Daylight Saving Sets daylight saving to ON or OFF Server SNTP Server Primary Sets the SNTP server to use for setting the current date and time You can enter up to 64 characters SNTP Server Secondary Manual Date Sets the current date and time manually Time Admin Password New Password Enter Password Verify Changes the administ...

Page 905: ...eless reconnection is executed IP Address Sets the IP address You can enter up to 15 characters Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask You can enter up to 15 characters Default Gateway Sets the gateway address You can enter up to 15 characters DNS Server Primary Sets the IP address for a Primary DNS server You can enter up to 15 characters DNS Server Secondary Sets the IP address for a Secondary DNS ser...

Page 906: ... Server Sets the IP address or host name for the POP3 server You can enter up to 64 characters POP User ID Sets the login ID to the server used for POP authentication You can enter up to 64 characters POP Password Sets the password to the server used for POP authentication You can enter up to 16 characters Test Sends a test mail to the Mail Server You can check if communication between your machin...

Page 907: ...906 ...

Page 908: ...work Path NULL Sets a server address and directory to store the scanned data You can enter up to 144 characters User Name NULL Sets a user name log in to the server You can enter up to 32 characters Password NULL Sets a password log in to the server You can enter up to 32 characters Transmission Option Encode Communication None Selects an encryption method for communication Not available when usin...

Page 909: ...Setup menu RGB Red 0 Green 0 Blue 0 Sets the RGB contrast The default value is the value set on Admin Setup menu File Name NULL Sets a file name You can enter up to 64 characters The following options can be set 1 n adding a serial number from 00000 to 99999 d adding the date of a file creation yymmddhhmmss Color Mode Auto Color Mono Sets scanning color File Format Auto Color Mono Multi PDF Sets a...

Page 910: ...r to enable PDF encryption Encryption Level Medium Sets the encryption level Document Open Password Disable Sets a password to open an encrypted PDF file A document open password cannot be the same as a permission password To encrypt a PDF file you must set a document open password or permission password You can enter up to 32 characters Password Password Verify NULL Enter a password twice Permiss...

Page 911: ... 59 The date and time when a file is created are values of the timer of MC873 An example of file name specification if the file format is PDF If specifying Data n Saved as file names such as Data0000 pdf and Data00001 pdf If specifying File d Saved as file names such as File090715185045 pdf If specifying Scan Scan pdf is created first and then data is saved with the name of Scan pdf For d refer to...

Page 912: ...911 ...

Page 913: ...ss Replace A list of destinations that can be registered is displayed Memo If you press Replace a destination can be registered or other destination can be replaced by a new one If you press Delete a destination will be deleted from the one touch button 6 Select a destination 7 Press OK when the setting is finished 8 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Item Factory default setting Descri...

Page 914: ...form operations more simply and quickly You can create a macro for settings on the following functions Copying Printing from USB Memory Scanning to e mail Scanning to network PC Scanning to USB Memory Fax Sending Internet Fax Sending Scanning to Fax Server Note If the user authentication is enabled log in to the machine before creating or editing a macro Memo You can register up to 16 macros Regis...

Page 915: ...b Macro Scan To E mail Basic tab Register to Job Macro Scan To USB Memory Scan To USB Memory tab Register to Job Macro Scan To Computer Basic tab Register to Job Macro Print from USB Memory Register to Job Macro Fax Sending Basic tab Register to Job Macro Internet Fax Sending Basic tab Register to Job Macro Scanning to Fax Server Basic tab Register to Job Macro 3 Press Register in the Job Macro li...

Page 916: ... are not permitted to use them and the screen returns to the JOB MACRO menu 3 Perform a job Editing a Macro Title You can edit a macro title 1 Press Job Macro 2 Press Edit 3 Select a macro and then press Title Edit 4 Enter a new title Entering Characters 5 Press OK Checking the Macro Content 1 Press Job Macro 2 Select a macro and then press Description 3 Check the content and then press Back If yo...

Page 917: ...2 Press Edit 3 Select a macro and then press Delete A confirmation screen is displayed 4 Press Yes 916 ...

Page 918: ...Editing Address Book E mail Address Fax Numbers 917 ...

Page 919: ...a Registered E mail Group from a Computer Importing and Exporting Destination E mail Addresses Registering an E mail Address from the Operator Panel Registering E mail Group from the Operator Panel Registering E mail Address from the History Deleting a Registered Destination from the Operator Panel Deleting a Registered E mail Group from the Operator Panel 918 ...

Page 920: ... Setting plug in You can install the User Setting plug in at the same time as when installing Configuration Tool or install the plug in later Installing Software You must register the machine in Configuration Tool in advance Starting Configuration Tool Using Configuration Tool About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs...

Page 921: ...5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 6 Click New E mail Address 7 Enter an e mail address and then click OK 8 Click Save to device 920 ...

Page 922: ... the changed settings are reflected to the machine Note To use the E mail Address Manager install the User Setting plug in Installing Software You must register Configuration Tool in the machine in advance Starting Configuration Tool Using Configuration Tool About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configurat...

Page 923: ...5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 6 Click New Group 7 Register a group and then click OK 8 Click Save to device 922 ...

Page 924: ...e changed settings are reflected to the machine About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click E mail Address Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 923 ...

Page 925: ...o delete and then click Delete Memo If you click Delete and Sort the selected destination is deleted and the subsequent numbers move up If you click Delete all all the destinations or groups are deleted 7 Click Save to device 924 ...

Page 926: ...to device the changed settings are reflected to the machine About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click E mail Address Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 925 ...

Page 927: ...6 Select a group to delete and then click Delete Memo If you click Delete all all the destinations or groups are deleted 7 Click Save to device 926 ...

Page 928: ...lling Software About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool Exporting Addresses to a File 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine that has the addresses you want to export from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click E mail Address Manager 5 Enter the administrator passwor...

Page 929: ... E mail Address Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Click Import from file 7 Click Open from Select CSV File 8 Select the file to import and then click Open 9 Click Next 10 Select the settings to import and then click Import 11 Click Save to device Memo CSV files exported from Outlook Express Windows Mail and Windows Live Mail can a...

Page 930: ...dress Book 3 Press E mail Address 4 Select a number and then press Register Memo You cannot select any numbers that are specified with the auto delivery function 5 Press the registration button of Name 6 Enter a name and then press OK You can enter up to 16 characters 7 Press the registration button of E mail Address 8 Enter an e mail address and then press OK 9 Press OK 929 ...

Page 931: ...ess E mail Group 4 Select a number and then press Register Memo To edit a registered address select Edit 5 Press the registration button of Name 6 Enter a name and then press OK You can enter up to 16 characters 7 Press the registration button of Address No 8 Select an e mail address and then press OK The check box is selected You can select multiple e mail addresses 9 Press OK 930 ...

Page 932: ...istory 4 Press Register to Address Book 5 Select an E mail address and then press Register 6 Press Register to free number Memo When overwriting a registered number select the number and then press Overwrite You cannot select any numbers that are specified with the auto delivery function 7 Press the registration button of Name 8 Enter a name and then press OK You can enter up to 16 characters 9 Pr...

Page 933: ...ote You cannot select any e mail addresses that are specified with the auto delivery function 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Address Book 3 Press E mail Address 4 Select a number and then press Delete 5 Press Yes on a confirmation screen 932 ...

Page 934: ...Registered E mail Group from the Operator Panel 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Address Book 3 Press E mail Group 4 Select a number and then press Delete 5 Press Yes on a confirmation screen 933 ...

Page 935: ...p Dial Number from a Computer Importing and Exporting Speed Dials of Destinations Registering a Fax Number from the Operator Panel Registering a Group Number from the Operator Panel Deleting a Registered Fax Number from the Operator Panel Deleting a Registered Group Dial Number from the Operator Panel Registering Fax Number from the History Configure One Touch Button 934 ...

Page 936: ... Manager install the User Setting plug in For details on how to install the plug in refer to Installing Software You must register the machine in Configuration Tool in advance Starting Configuration Tool Using Configuration Tool About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 ...

Page 937: ...5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 6 Click New Speed Dial 7 Enter a fax number and then click OK 8 Click Save to device 936 ...

Page 938: ...o use the Speed Dial Manager install the User Setting plug in For details on how to install the plug in refer to Installing Software You must register the machine in Configuration Tool in advance Starting Configuration Tool Using Configuration Tool About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool C...

Page 939: ...5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 6 Click New Group 7 Register a group and then click OK 8 Click Save to device 938 ...

Page 940: ...hanged settings are reflected to the machine About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click Speed Dial Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 939 ...

Page 941: ... delete and then click Delete Memo If you click Delete and Sort the selected destination is deleted and the subsequent numbers move up If you click Delete all all the destinations or groups are deleted 7 Click Save to device 940 ...

Page 942: ...e the changed settings are reflected to the machine About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click Speed Dial Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK 941 ...

Page 943: ...6 Select the group to delete and then click Delete Memo If you click Delete all all the destinations or groups are deleted 7 Click Save to device 942 ...

Page 944: ...talling Software About icons used in Configuration Tool List of Icons used in Configuration Tool Exporting Speed Dials to a File 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine that has the speed dials you want to export from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click Speed Dial Manager 5 Enter the administrator passw...

Page 945: ...ick Speed Dial Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Click Import from file 7 Click Open from Select CSV File 8 Select the file to import and then click Open 9 Click Next 10 Select the settings to import and then click Import 11 Click Save to device Memo CSV files exported from Outlook Express Windows Mail and Windows Live Mail can al...

Page 946: ...fer to Entering Characters Memo The numbers that are registered in groups with the Speed Dial function synchronize the numbers that are registered in groups with the Group No function 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Phone Book 3 Press Speed Dial 4 Select a speed dial number and then press Register 5 Press the registration button of Name 6 Enter a name You can enter up to 24 char...

Page 947: ...9 Enter a fax number You can enter up to 40 digits 10 Press OK 946 ...

Page 948: ...stered in groups with the Group No function 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Phone Book 3 Press Group No 4 Select a group number and then press Register The check box is selected You can select multiple items 5 Press the registration button of Name 6 Enter a name You can enter up to 16 characters 7 Press OK 8 Press the registration button of Speed Dial 9 Select speed dial numbers...

Page 949: ...948 ...

Page 950: ...nnot delete the speed dial numbers that are used with the reserved transmission or auto delivery 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Phone Book 3 Press Speed Dial 4 Select a speed dial number and then press Delete 5 Press Yes on a confirmation screen 949 ...

Page 951: ...o Even if you delete a group the numbers that are registered as the speed dial numbers are not deleted 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Phone Book 3 Press Group No 4 Select a group number and then press Delete 5 Press Yes on a confirmation screen 950 ...

Page 952: ... Speed Dial 6 Select a speed dial number and then press Register 7 Press Register to free number Memo When overwriting a registered number select the number and then press Over Write You cannot select any numbers that are specified with the auto delivery function 8 Press the registration button of Name 9 Enter a name and then press OK You can enter up to 24 characters 10 Press OK 11 Repeat steps 3...

Page 953: ...ss Replace A list of destinations that can be registered is displayed Memo If you press Replace a destination can be registered or other destination can be replaced by a new one If you press Delete a destination will be deleted from the one touch button 6 Select a destination 7 Press OK when the setting is finished 8 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Item Factory default setting Descri...

Page 954: ...placing Consumables Solve Problems with the Machine Save Consumables and Costs Enhance Security Improve Efficiency Utilize a Paper Document As Data Moving or Transporting This Machine Checking the Status of This Machine 953 ...

Page 955: ...an M magenta Y yellow Toner Cartridge Replacing the Image Drum Replacing the Image Drum and Toner Cartridge at the Same Time Replacing the Belt Unit Replacing the Fuser Unit Replacing the Feed Roller Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Replacing the Feed Roller MP Tray 954 ...

Page 956: ...curs If the STATUS Button on the Operator Panel Lights Up or Flashes Solve Problems in Each Function Copy Problems Scan Problems Print Problems Fax Problems AirPrint Problems Google Cloud Print Problems Solve Problems with a Computer You can check a solution to a problem with a computer Problems on Other Software Problems on Configuration Tool About Restrictions on Each OS Solve Problems with the ...

Page 957: ...Problems on the Machine or Paper Troubleshooting 956 ...

Page 958: ...iple pages on a sheet of paper are available Printing on Both Sides of Paper Duplex Printing Combining Multiple Pages onto One Sheet of Paper Tips for Saving on Faxing The auto delivery function that enables you to receive a fax as an e mail attachment file is available You can check the fax content by e mail allowing you to save paper by printing necessary documents only Forwarding Received Docum...

Page 959: ...ation costs are low Sending at a Specified Date and Time Delayed Tx Using the Internet Line Use the Internet Fax function You can reduce more costs than standard faxes because you send and receive faxes through the Internet line Sending an Internet Fax Procedure Reduce Printing Costs Use the toner save mode function You can reduce more toner consumption than usual when printing Saving Toner 958 ...

Page 960: ...nt is encrypted before being sent from a computer protecting the information from illegal access Setting a Password and Encrypting the Print Data Encrypted Authentication Print Encrypt Document and Require User Authentication before Printing Use the authentication print function The user information currently logging in is automatically obtained and attached encrypted print job so that you do not ...

Page 961: ...nctions for sending faxes The functions are useful for preventing wrong fax transmission Preventing Wrong Fax Transmissions Restrict Computers on Which Remote Scan Can be Used You can restrict computers on which Remote Scan can be used Registering a Computer That is Connected 960 ...

Page 962: ...ok function and the phone book function You can register frequently used e mail and fax transmission destinations allowing you to specify a destination easily just by selecting from registered ones when sending a document Registering an E mail Destination E mail Address Registering a Fax Destination Fax Numbers Registering an Internet Fax Destination E mail Address Set This Machine Remotely From a...

Page 963: ...ived fax printing from the PC etc Printouts of a copy job Switching Output Trays Printouts of received fax Switching Output Trays Printouts of PC printing About Screens and Functions of Each Printer Driver Printouts of data in a USB Memory Printing Data in USB Memory Printouts of E mail attachment files or received Internet fax Printing E mail Attachment Files 962 ...

Page 964: ...ned document into a PDF file or another data file format and save the file to USB Memory that is connected to this machine Saving Scanned Data in USB Memory Send a Scanned Document to an Application on a Computer Use the Scan to PC function You can send a scanned document to an application and edit an image Sending Scanned Data to a Computer Receive a Received Fax As an E mail Attachment File Use ...

Page 965: ...Saving Sent and Received Data Transmission Data Save 964 ...

Page 966: ...hine This section explains how to move or transport your machine Moving This Machine This section describes cautions for moving this machine Transporting This Machine This section describes cautions for transporting this machine 965 ...

Page 967: ...Checking the Status of This Machine Web Page of This Machine 966 ...

Page 968: ...g Management Specifications Changing the Administrator Password Administrator Setup Management Software User Authentication Access Control Account Management Moving Transporting This Machine Specifications 967 ...

Page 969: ... several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press or several times and press Management 5 Press or several times and press Admin Password 6 Enter a new password and then press OK 7 Enter the password again 8 Press OK Note Be careful not to forget the administrat...

Page 970: ...ange the default settings of the copy functions for this machine Fax Setup You can check and change the default settings of the fax functions and other various basic settings FaxServer Function You can check and change the default settings of the FaxServer function for this machine Internet Fax Setup You can check and change the default settings of the Internet Fax function for this machine Scanne...

Page 971: ...mode and other various settings related to the machine management User Install You can check and change the time zone time and other various default settings required for managing this machine 970 ...

Page 972: ...the default value of the show through removal function Outside Erase Setting OFF Sets whether to enable or disable the outside erase function Range Adjustment 3 Sets the criteria of the outside erase function Contrast 0 Sets the default contrast Hue 0 Sets the default value of the hue Saturation 0 Sets the default value of the saturation RGB 0 Sets the default value of RGB contrast Direction Top E...

Page 973: ... 1 Sets the start number of the page number Position Lower Right Sets the printing position of the page number String User Name OFF Sets whether to add the user name as watermarks Model Name OFF Sets whether to add the model name as watermarks Date Time OFF Sets whether to add the date and time as watermarks Free Word OFF Sets whether to add a character string as watermarks String NULL Sets a char...

Page 974: ...973 ...

Page 975: ... add the sender s name to the header of the sent fax by default Transmit Confirmation Report OFF or ON Sets whether to automatically print transmission results by default Memory Tx ON Sets whether to use Memory transmission ON or real time transmission OFF by default Configure Shortcuts 01 Manual Dial 02 Speed Dial 03 Group List 04 Redial 05 Off Hook 06 Resolution Sets the shortcut button for the ...

Page 976: ...ete after printing Yes Sets whether to delete a fax image after printing Other Settings Redial Tries 2 time s Sets the number of redial attempts Available range 0 to 9 times Redial Interval 1 minute s Sets the time between redial attempts Available range 0 to 5 minutes Block Junk Fax Setting OFF Sets Block Junk mode Fax Registered List Register Edit NULL Register Edit addresses for Block Junk Fax ...

Page 977: ...report Print Time 0 Hour 0 Minute 0 Second Sets the date and time for printing the daily report Tone For Echo For Transmission Disable Displays only if Service Bit is ON Tone For Echo For Reception Disable Displays only if Service Bit is ON H Modem Rate For Tx 33 6 Kbps Sets the default modem reception transmission speed while the machine is sending a fax H Modem Rate For Rx 33 6 Kbps Sets the def...

Page 978: ...ou have any fax reception problems they may be improved if this type is set Type 2 A fax signal is detected right after the answering machine answers Set this type if you usually use this machine as a phone Tel Priority Mode OFF Sets when the external telephone and the machine ring in Tel Fax Ready mode ON The sender is assumed to make a voice call The telephone rings early CNG Detection OFF Sets ...

Page 979: ...978 ...

Page 980: ...ault setting of the background removal Continuous Scan OFF Sets whether to use Continuous Scan mode by default Preview OFF Sets the preview image of sending image Compression Rate Low Selects the default compression level Configure Shortcuts 01 Manual Dial 02 Speed Dial 03 Group List 04 Tx History 05 Scan Size Sets the shortcut button for the Internet Fax tab Security Function Broadcast Destinatio...

Page 981: ...solution Background Removal Auto Sets the default background removal Continuous Scan OFF Sets whether to use Continuous Scan mode by default Preview OFF Sets the preview image of sending image Compression Rate Low Selects the default compression level Configure Shortcuts 01 Manual Input 02 Address Book 03 Group List 04 Tx History 05 LDAP Sets the shortcut button for the Internet Fax tab 980 ...

Page 982: ... value of the show through removal function Resolution 200dpi Sets the default resolution Contrast 0 Sets the default contrast Hue 0 Sets the default red green color balance Saturation 0 Sets the default saturation RGB R 0 G 0 B 0 Sets the default RGB contrast Continuous Scan OFF Sets whether to use Continuous Scan mode by default Preview OFF Sets the preview image of sending image File Format Aut...

Page 983: ...n the surrounding of 2 page spread documents Width 5 mm 0 2 inch Sets an erasing width Available range 5 to 50 mm 0 2 to 2 0 inches 1 mm increment Center Erase Setting OFF Sets whether to eliminate the shadow lines in the center of the two spread document Width 5 mm 0 2 inch Sets an erasing width Available range 5 to 50 mm 0 2 to 2 0 inches 1 mm increment White Page Skip OFF Sets whether to enable...

Page 984: ... OFF Sets whether to print a confirmation after transmission of Internet fax and Scan To E mail Timeout of MCF Report 15 minutes Sets the timeout for printing a confirmation after transmission of Internet fax and Scan To E mail If the setting period of time is exceeded the report is automatically printed without the MDN response Print Check Message OFF Sets whether to report the error content if a...

Page 985: ...igit serial number from 00000 to 99999 If specifying d Date and time when a file is created 12 digit number in yymmddhhmmss format yy Year created the last two digits of the Christian Era hh Hours created 00 to 23 mm Month created 01 to 12 mm Minute created 00 to 59 dd Date created 01 to 31 ss Second created 00 to 59 The date and time when a file is created are values of the timer of MC873 An exam...

Page 986: ...985 ...

Page 987: ... Grayscale Paper Feed Tray 1 Specify a paper tray to use Copies 1 Sets the number of copies Duplex OFF Turns the duplex printing function on or off OFF simplex printing Long Edge Bind duplex printing for long edge binding Short Edge Bind duplex printing for short edge binding Fit ON Specify whether to match the paper 986 ...

Page 988: ...ze in the tray Override A4 Letter Yes Set the function that automatically switches paper to print from A4 to Letter if a tray runs out of A4 paper and Letter paper is loaded or from Letter to A4 if a tray runs out of Letter paper Resolution 600dpi Sets the resolution Toner Save Toner Save Level OFF Sets the amount of toner to be saved This setting is enabled when copying printing printing received...

Page 989: ...st becomes weak or blots or lines become conspicuous when printing on plain paper If fine blots or lines appear decrease the value If the dark part becomes light increase the value Paper Color Setting 0 Adjusts finely if the color contrast becomes weak or blots or lines become conspicuous when printing on plain paper If fine blots or lines appear decrease the value If the dark part becomes light i...

Page 990: ...on of the image on the back side of a duplex print parallel to the direction of paper movement Available range 2 00 mm 0 25 increments Y Adjust 0 mm Duplex X Adjust 0 mm Duplex Y Adjust 0 mm Tray 2 3 4 Optional X Adjust 0 mm Y Adjust 0 mm Duplex X Adjust 0 mm Duplex Y Adjust 0 mm MP Tray X Adjust 0 mm Y Adjust 0 mm Duplex X Adjust 0 mm Duplex Y Adjust 0 mm Drum Cleaning OFF Sets whether to clean t...

Page 991: ...UCR Low Adjusts the level of under color removal CMY100 Density CMY100 Density Disable Selects whether to use halftone for C M Y 100 density CMYK Conversion CMYK Conversion ON Selects whether to use simple quick mode when performing CMYK Conversion This menu setting is disabled if using the ink simulation function System Configuration Menu Item Factory default setting Description Personality Auto ...

Page 992: ...whether to print blank pages CR Function CR Sets the machine operation when receiving CR code LF Function LF Sets the machine operation when receiving LF code Print Margin Normal Sets the nonprintable area of the page True Black OFF Selects whether to print black image data using mixed CMYK or print using black toner only Pen Width Adjust ON Sets whether to emphasize thin lines so that the lines l...

Page 993: ...s character pitches in IBM PPR emulation Font Condense 12CPI to 20CPI Specifies 12CPI pitches for Condense Mode Character Set SET 2 Specifies a character set Symbol Set IBM 437 Specifies a symbol set Letter O Style Disable Specifies the style that replaces 9BH with letter o and 9DH with a zero Zero Character Normal Sets the zero to be slashed or unslashed Line Pitch 6 LPI Specifies the line spacin...

Page 994: ...shed Line Pitch 6 LPI Specifies the line spacing White Page Skip OFF Selects whether to print blank pages CR Function CR Select a carriage return from CR or CR LF Line Length 80 Column Specifies the number of characters per line Form Length 11 7 inch or 11 inch Specifies the length of paper TOF Position 0 0 inch Specifies the distance from the top edge of paper to where the cut is to be made Left ...

Page 995: ...Set how to delete a job You can overwrite deleted data so that it will not be restored If enabled it will take longer to delete Available value No overwrite Zero out once Multiple random overwrites Keep job for 2 hours Set the storage period of jobs If the set period elapses after jobs are stored the jobs will be automatically deleted Available value 15 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 2 hours 4 hours 8 ...

Page 996: ...995 ...

Page 997: ...play condition TCP IP protocol is enabled Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Sets a gateway address Display condition TCP IP protocol is enabled DHCPv6 Disable Selects enable disable of DHCP when IPv6 is used DNS Server Primary 0 0 0 0 Sets the IP address for a Primary DNS server Display condition TCP IP protocol is enabled DNS Server Secondary 0 0 0 0 Sets the IP address for a Secondary DNS server Display c...

Page 998: ...rom a Web browser Display condition TCP IP protocol is enabled Telnet Disable Sets whether to enable access from the Telnet Display condition TCP IP protocol is enabled FTP Disable Sets whether to enable access with FTP Display condition TCP IP protocol is enabled IPSec Disable This item is displayed only if IPSec is set to valid This item can be changed to disable only SNMP Enable Sets whether to...

Page 999: ...cuted WPS PIN WPS PIN is executed Wireless Network Selection A list of access point name found in the search Displays a list of wireless LAN access points names that are found in a search Manual Setup SSID NULL Enter an SSID Security Disable Selects the security of the wireless LAN function WPA2 EAP can set only in Web WEP Key NULL Enter the WEP key WPA Encryption Type AES Select a WPA2 PSK encryp...

Page 1000: ...ting Disable Sets the protocol to be used for receiving e mails POP3 Server NULL Sets the IP address or server name for the POP3 server POP3 Port 110 Sets the port number prepared by POP3 on the POP3 server Available range 1 to 65535 POP Encryption None Selects an encryption method in the POP communication Authentication Method No Authentication Selects an authentication method for e mail transmis...

Page 1001: ...ets the maximum number of search results from the LDAP server Search Root NULL Specifies a position to start searching the LDAP directory Attribute Name1 cn Specifies the attribute name searched for as the user name Name2 sn Name3 givenName E mail Address mail Specifies the attribute name searched for as an e mail address Additional Filter NULL Specify the attribute name to be added when searching...

Page 1002: ...mous Encryption None Sets the encryption of communication to the LDAP server Secure Protocol Server Setting Domain NULL Sets a realm name for the Kerberos certification You can enter up to 64 characters Memo To apply the settings that are changed on the Network Menu menu you must restart a network card Restart the network card according to a confirmation screen that is displayed when you change se...

Page 1003: ...1002 ...

Page 1004: ...Configure Home Screen Factory default setting Description Copy Scan Print Fax Internet Fax Troubleshoot Register frequently used functions on the Home Screen 1003 ...

Page 1005: ...able the soft reset command Speed 480Mpbs Selects the maximum transfer speed of USB interface Offline Receive Disable Set whether to receive data in offline state or in recoverable error state Serial Number Enable Sets whether to use a USB serial number USB Assignment IPP Selects IPP USB or Legacy for USB assignment When scanning via USB select Legacy System Setup Access Control Disable Sets acces...

Page 1006: ...ation operation when entering standby status from Sleep mode If ON is set it is quiet as there is no print preparation If OFF is set there is a rotation noise of the image to perform print preparation but you can start first printing early ECO Mode 1 ON If ON is set Printing starts even before the temperature of the fuser reaches the prescribed degrees if the job is small If OFF is set Printing st...

Page 1007: ...assword 6 to 12 characters can be used Reset Settings 2 Execute Deletes job macros fax transmission reception data and the history information and returns the settings to the default Job Log Setup Clear Job Log 3 Execute Clears the saved job logs Print Statistics Supplies Report Disable Sets whether to print the consumable counter s report Reset Main Counter Execute Resets the main counter Reset S...

Page 1008: ...1007 ...

Page 1009: ...al Setup 2001 1 1 0 00 Sets the current date and time manually Power Setup Auto Power Off Auto Config Sets the behavior of Automatic Power Off High Humid Mode OFF Sets whether to enable the humidity mode Drum Near Life Timing 3000 Sets the timing for the near life warning for the drum cartridges Fuser Near Life Timing 2500 Sets the timing for the near life warning for the fuser unit Belt Near Life...

Page 1010: ...a busy tone Monitor Control OFF Select from three choices OFF Not to monitor Type 1 Monitor till receiving sending the first valid facsimile signal Type 2 Execute Type 1 monitoring during communication Monitor Volume Middle Sets the Monitor Volume OFF Low Middle High TTI Register Edit TTI 1 NULL Registers or changes the transmission terminal identification the name of a sender You can enter up to ...

Page 1011: ...whether to use Super G3 ultra high speed communication mode Wireless Module Disable Erase Privacy Data 1 Execute Deletes the registered privacy data Display condition The job accounting is invalid 1 A message is displayed to confirm the equipment restarts Select Yes to continue Select No to cancel 2 When you set the dial tone detection setting to ON the machine does not dial if the dial tone is no...

Page 1012: ...Management Software Using Configuration Tool Web Page of This Machine 1011 ...

Page 1013: ...sword PIN or IC card information to log in to the machine Note The settings for fax transmission also apply to fax transmission from a computer To perform user authentication and access control one of the following operations is required Registering a user information from the Web Page Registering Users Registering a PIN from Configuration Tool Registering a PIN Topics Managing users from the Web ...

Page 1014: ...1013 ...

Page 1015: ...nd press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press OK 5 Press Management 6 Press System Setup 7 Press Access Control to set it to Enable Memo Pressing Access Control switches between Enable and Disable When the access control is enabled the following screen appears when the auth...

Page 1016: ...ntication Method on the portal login screen to change 3 Press OK If the authentication succeeds the home screen is displayed Log into This Machine For the Administrator 1 Press Administrator 2 Enter the administrator name and then press OK 3 Enter the administrator password and then press OK 4 Press OK If the authentication succeeded the home screen is displayed Log Out from This Machine When you ...

Page 1017: ...1016 ...

Page 1018: ...the File menu 2 Select the necessary printer driver in Select Printer and then click Preferences 3 Select the Extend tab 4 Click User Authentication 5 Select the Use User Authentication check box 6 Enter the user name in Username and the password in Password If you click Use Windows Login your login name on Windows is automatically entered 7 Click OK 8 Click OK and then click Print 1017 ...

Page 1019: ...1018 ...

Page 1020: ...riptions may vary depending on your application 1 Select Print from the File menu 2 Select the printer driver of this machine 3 Select User Authentication from the panel menu 4 Select the Use User Authentication check box 5 Enter the user name in User Name and the password in Password 6 Click Print 1019 ...

Page 1021: ...menu 2 Select the fax driver of this machine in Select Printer and then click Preferences 3 Click User Authentication on the Setup tab 4 Select the Use User Authentication check box 5 Enter the user name in Username and the password in Password If you click Use Windows Login your login name on Windows is automatically entered 6 Click OK 7 Click OK and then click Print 1020 ...

Page 1022: ...1021 ...

Page 1023: ...h time users print corresponding numbers of points are subtracted from their accounts Users whose remaining points reach 0 cannot print Before enabling the account management you need to register user information Access Control To enable the account management follow the procedure below Enabling Account Management To assign an account to each user and set numbers of points to jobs follow the proce...

Page 1024: ...This Machine 2 Log in as the administrator Log In as the Administrator 3 Click Account Management 4 Click Basic Settings 5 Enable the access control in STEP1 Set access limits and then click Submit Note When the access control is enabled the login screen appears on the touch panel 1023 ...

Page 1025: ...click Submit Limited Usage Mode Set an action when your points are insufficient Display Time of The Insufficient Balance Error When you do not have enough points to perform the job the error screen appears on the operator panel Set the period of time for displaying the error screen Operations When Balance is Insufficient Set whether to cancel or continue printing when the remaining points reach 0 ...

Page 1026: ...Click Account Management 4 Click Summary Account Settings 5 Click Individual Account Settings 6 Click a user whom you set a number of points 7 Enter assigned amount balance and set operation when balance is insufficient Points are charged for each print job Memo For the balance you cannot enter a number larger than that for the assigned amount 1025 ...

Page 1027: ...8 Click Submit 1026 ...

Page 1028: ...chine 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Click Account Management 4 Click Summary Account Settings 5 Click Creating setting deleting shared account 6 Click 7 Enter Shared Account Name Assigned Amount and Balance and then set Operation When Balance is Insufficient 8 Set a role which can use the shared account 1027 ...

Page 1029: ...For the role see Access Control Access Control 9 Click Submit 1028 ...

Page 1030: ... print two pages you need twice as much as the set rate In addition you can apply point reduction system for two sided printing or saving toner to print 1 Open the Web page of the machine 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Click Account Management 4 Click Cost Settings 5 Set paper size points toner points Memo The default value for each paper size point is calculated based on the area ratio of the pa...

Page 1031: ...To restore the factory default settings click Reset 7 Click Submit 1030 ...

Page 1032: ...D Secure Print follow the procedure below 1 Log into the machine 2 If several accounts are available select an account to use Memo To switch accounts log out from the current account and then log into another account 3 Perform required operation When printing from a computer see Printing in the Windows Environment 1031 ...

Page 1033: ...t executed ask your administrator for checking your balance in Summary Account Settings The period of time from when the shortage of points is detected to when the machine deletes the job can be set on the web page of the machine If printing stops due to point shortage you need to cancel the current job or add points and complete printing to execute the next print jobs Memo Contact the administrat...

Page 1034: ...Moving Transporting This Machine Moving This Machine Transporting This Machine 1033 ...

Page 1035: ...64 kg 1 Turn the machine off Turning the Machine On or Off 2 Unplug all the cables Power cord LAN or USB cable Telephone cable 3 Remove any paper from the paper trays 4 Fold the tip over protection tools 5 Lift up this machine and then move it to a new location Injury may result 1034 ...

Page 1036: ...ight or strong light approximately 1 500 lux or more Even under room lighting do not leave the image drum for five minutes or more 1 Turn the machine off Turning the Machine On or Off 2 Unplug all the cables Power cord LAN or USB cable Telephone cable 3 Remove any paper from the paper trays 4 If the optional additional tray unit or cabinet is installed remove the 4 lock pieces 5 Lift up the machin...

Page 1037: ...6 Attach the packing material to the machine Note Use the packing box and packing material attached to this machine when purchased 7 Lift up the machine and put it in the packing box 1036 ...

Page 1038: ...rnet Fax Specifications Scanner Specifications Scan to E mail Specifications Scan to Shared Folder Specifications Scan to USB Memory Specifications Scan to Computer Specifications Printing Specifications Printing from USB Memory Specifications Network Specifications Wireless LAN Specifications Option 1037 ...

Page 1039: ... W Sleep mode Less than 30 W w o option Deep sleep mode Less than 3 W w o option Power save mode Less than 30 W w o option Off mode Less than 0 15 W Operating condition Operating Temperature 10 32 Humidity 20 80 RH Idle Temperature 0 43 Humidity 10 90 RH Interface USB 2 0 Hi Speed Ethernet 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T IEEE802 11 b g n a Wireless LAN Option Display Graphics panel Color touch pane...

Page 1040: ...ement Statement Folio 8 5 SQ Document glass A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A6 B4 B5 B5 Tabloid Letter Letter Legal 13 13 5 14 Executive Statement Statement Folio 8 5 SQ First copy time Color 12 5 seconds ADF Document glass Mono 12 5 seconds ADF 11 5 seconds Document glass Copies Up to 999 Copy speed Color Up to 23 cpm Up to 35 cpm Mono Up to 23 cpm Up to 35 cpm 1039 ...

Page 1041: ... Tabloid Letter Letter Legal 13 13 5 14 Statement Folio Document glass A3 A4 A4 A5 B4 B5 Tabloid Letter Letter Legal 13 13 5 14 Statement Folio Transmission speed Approx 2 seconds page ITU T MMR Normal Stored document Memory size 8 MB Storage document capacity Up to 400 pages ITU T no 1 MMR Normal Resolution Normal 8 dots x 3 85 line mm Fine 8 dots x 7 7 line mm Photo 8 dots x 7 7 line mm Extra Fi...

Page 1042: ...USB 2 0 Hi Speed Ethernet 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T IEEE802 11 b g n a Wireless LAN Option Supported OS Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003 1041 ...

Page 1043: ...Internet Fax Specifications Item MC853 MC873 ES8453 ES8473 Communication protocol SMTP POP3 MIME File format TIFF TIFF 1042 ...

Page 1044: ...kness ADF 60 120 g m2 16 32 lb Document glass 20 mm ADF document capacity 100 sheets 80 g m2 Scanning area ADF 105 x 148 297 x 431 8 mm 4 13 x 5 8 11 7 x 17 inches Document glass 297 x 431 8 mm 11 7 x 17 inches or less Scanning speed Color Approx 1 2 seconds page A4 300 x 300 dpi ADF simplex Mono Approx 1 2 seconds page A4 300 x 300 dpi ADF simplex 1043 ...

Page 1045: ...tem MC853 MC873 ES8453 ES8473 Communication protocol SMTP POP3 MIME File format PDF supported encryption High compressed M S TIFF RAW G3 G4 compressed JPEG JFIF color grayscale only XPS Mail server authentication SMTP AUTH POP3 1044 ...

Page 1046: ...d Folder Specifications Item MC853 MC873 ES8453 ES8473 Communication protocol FTP HTTP CIFS File format PDF supported encryption High compressed M S TIFF RAW G3 G4 compressed JPEG JFIF color grayscale only XPS 1045 ...

Page 1047: ...ivity interface USB2 0 Host IF Storage device USB Memory Up to 32 GB Not all USB Memory products are guaranteed to work Supported file system FAT12 FAT FAT16 FAT32 File format PDF encryption High compressed M TIFF RAW G3 G4 compressed JPEG JFIF color grayscale only XPS 1046 ...

Page 1048: ...to Computer Specifications Item MC853 MC873 ES8453 ES8473 Communication protocol Windows TWAIN WIA WSD Mac OS X ICA File format TWAIN WIA ICA PDF TIFF JPEG BMP PCX GIF TGA PNG WMF WSD JPEG PNG TIFF BMP 1047 ...

Page 1049: ... mm 184 x 260 mm Custom size Additional tray unit Optional Legal 13 13 5 14 Letter Executive Tabloid 8 5 inches SQ Folio A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 8K 260 x 368 mm 270 x 390 mm 273 x 394 mm 16K 197 x 273 mm 195 x 270 mm 184 x 260 mm Custom size MP Tray Legal 13 13 5 14 Letter Executive Tabloid Statement 8 5 inches SQ Folio A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 B6 Index card 3 x 5 inches 4 x 6 inches 5 x 7 inches Banner up to 52 ...

Page 1050: ...applicable to special media such as envelopes Print precision Print beginning 2 mm paper skew 1 mm 100 mm Image expansion 1 mm 100 mm 80 g m2 Warm up time From power on 32 seconds at room temperature 25 rated voltage From power save mode 27 seconds st room temperature 25 rated voltage Usage Environment Conditions When in operation 10 32 Relative Humidity of 20 80 maximum wet bulb temperature of 25...

Page 1051: ...1050 ...

Page 1052: ...Interface USB 2 0 High Speed Host IF Storage device USB Memory Up to 32 GB Not all USB Memory products are guaranteed to work Supported file system FAT12 FAT FAT16 FAT32 File format PDF v1 7 Does not support encrypted PDF JPEG TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline XPS PRN PS PCL XPS 1051 ...

Page 1053: ...00BASE TX 1000BASE T IEEE802 11 a b g n Wireless LAN Protocol TCP IPv4 TCP IPv6 NetBIOS over TCP LPR Port9100 IPP FTP HTTP TELNET SMTP POP3 SNMPv1 v3 DHCP DHCPv6 DNS DDNS UPnP WINS SLP Bonjour SNTP LLTD Web Services Discovery WSD SSL TLS IPSec CIFS SMB Version 1 0 LDAPv3 Kerberos 1052 ...

Page 1054: ... this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differen...

Page 1055: ...orme aux limites d exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques RF de la FCC lignes directrices d exposition et d exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques RF CNR 102 de l IC Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps Europe CE Declaration of ...

Page 1056: ...Network AirPrint Google Cloud Print Network Topics Software Network Settings Network Problems 1055 ...

Page 1057: ...e iPad and iPod touch with using AirPrint Print An overview of AirPrint is provided and the basic settings are described here About AirPrint Print Scan FaxOut Service Setting AirPrint Print Scan FaxOut Service Registering the Machine in a Computer Mac OS X Printing with AirPrint Print Scanning with AirPrint Scan Sending a Fax with AirPrint FaxOut Service 1056 ...

Page 1058: ...rint you can easily print a photo e mail Web page or other displays on the screen just by tapping the screen a few times AirPrint Scan is a feature to send scanned image on this machine to a Mac AirPrint FaxOut Service is a FAX sending function that is provided by Apple Inc AirPrint FaxOut Service allows you to send faxes directly from a Mac These features require to connect this machine to a Mac ...

Page 1059: ...ss points with a wired or wireless LAN If you want to connect with a wireless LAN set the wireless LAN in advance Connecting This Machine to a Network If using a router or hub as an access point on a wired LAN connect this machine to the router or hub with a LAN cable Connecting This Machine to a Network To use AirPrint from a Mac computer connect this machine to the Mac To print by using AirPrint...

Page 1060: ...creen of Mac OS X 10 10 is used as an example 1 Turn the machine and computer on to establish a connection 2 Select System Preferences from the Apple menu 3 Click Printers Scanners 4 Click and then click Add Printer or Scanner 5 Select OKI MC873 and then click Add 6 Check that the machine is displayed in Printers and OKI MC873 AirPrint is displayed in Kind 1059 ...

Page 1061: ...7 Close Printers Scanners 1060 ...

Page 1062: ... OS X Printing from an iOS Device 1 Open a file 2 Tap Action 3 Tap Print The name of the printer model that you used most recently and exists on the same network is displayed Note If you print for the first time and any model name other than this machine is displayed select this machine in step 4 4 Tap Printer to select your machine The functions that this machine supports are displayed 5 Set opti...

Page 1063: ...6 Tap Print Printing from a Computer Mac OS X 1 Open a file 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select OKI MC873 from Printer 4 Set options 5 Click Print 1062 ...

Page 1064: ... and Secure Scan 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press or several times and press Admin Setup 3 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Scanner Setup 5 Press PC Scan Mode 6 Select a scan mode and then press OK 7 Press Back until the home screen is displayed Simple Scan Mode 1 C...

Page 1065: ...n Mode 1 Press the SCAN button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 3 Press Remote Scan AirPrint 4 Start a scan program on the computer 5 Click a scan button in the scan program Secure Scan Mode 1 Press the SCAN button 2 Set a document in the ADF or on the document glass 1064 ...

Page 1066: ...3 Press Remote Scan AirPrint 4 Start a scan program on the computer 5 Click a scan button in the scan program 1065 ...

Page 1067: ...ac OS X 10 10 is used as an example 1 Open a file 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select OKI MC873 Fax from Printer 4 Enter the destination Enter Dialing Prefix and check Use cover page as necessary You can specify multiple destinations 5 Select Fax To display this screen open Open Print Queue of Printers Scanners from System Preferences before procedures To cancel select x 1066 ...

Page 1068: ...Cloud Print is provided and the basic settings and management are described here About Google Cloud Print Setting Google Cloud Print Printing with Google Cloud Print Checking Google Cloud Print Registrations Checking or Changing the Use of Cloud Service Settings Deleting the Registered Information Checking That Deletion is Complete About Importing the CA Licenses of the Proxy Server 1067 ...

Page 1069: ...nt establishes communications via the Internet it is recommended to employ security measures Restrict communications from the Internet with a firewall or other security system Change the administrator password that is provided by the machine from the default value Network devices The network devices are computers or mobile devices that are connected to the Internet Set up Google Cloud Print or per...

Page 1070: ...1069 ...

Page 1071: ...cribes the procedure for setting the servers from the operator panel it is recommended to set the servers from the Web page of this machine if you can operate from a computer To check from the Web page select Admin Setup Network TCP IP in About Items That Can be Set or Checked 1 Access the Google Web site from a computer smartphone or other mobile device Google Web site https accounts google com s...

Page 1072: ...rimary setting value Since 0 0 0 0 indicates that the value is not set correctly set the IP address that suits your environment If the secondary DNS server is used check the DNS Server Secondary setting value If the proxy server is used press Proxy to Enable and then proceed to step 10 9 Press Proxy Server 10 Enter a server name You can enter up to 64 characters 1071 ...

Page 1073: ...rt number 14 Press OK 15 Press Proxy User ID 16 Enter the proxy user ID You can enter up to 64 characters 17 Press OK 18 Press Proxy Password 19 Enter the proxy password You can enter up to 64 characters Memo For the setting values contact your network administrator 1072 ...

Page 1074: ...ote A Google account is required for registration message is displayed select Yes 25 The authentication destination URL is displayed Press Print and the authentication destination URL is printed Note There is a time restriction for registration authentication processing approximately 10 minutes Proceed to step 32 within the time restriction to complete the registration If you cannot complete withi...

Page 1075: ...d enter the Google account information and then click Sign in 28 When the registration screen is displayed click Finish printer registration 29 Wait until the Thanks you re ready to go message is displayed 30 When the registration content and completion message is displayed on the operator of the machine check the message by scrolling the screen Topics 1074 ...

Page 1076: ...Printing with Google Cloud Print 1075 ...

Page 1077: ...atically When the machine receives the print data it is automatically printed 1 Check that the machine is turned on 2 Start an application that supports Google Cloud Print from a computer or mobile device Memo Google Cloud Print supports Google Chrome Gmail Google Drive or other applications 3 Tap the wrench icon or the drop down list in the application and then select Print from the displayed dro...

Page 1078: ...e or Pause For details on Using Cloud Service refer to Checking or Changing the Use of Cloud Service Settings Changing Printing Settings To change printing settings select Option on the printer selection screen that is displayed when you print from a supported application You cannot change printing settings from the machine Cancelling Printing To cancel during printing cancel from the machine Canc...

Page 1079: ...1078 ...

Page 1080: ...Print 1 Access the Google Web site from a computer smartphone or other mobile device Google Web site https accounts google com 2 Enter the Google account information and then click Sign in 3 Click Print The registered printers are displayed Checking from the Web Page 1 Open a Web browser 2 Enter http The IP address of this machine in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Addres...

Page 1081: ...aa respectively 4 Click SKIP 5 Click View Information 6 Click Network 7 Check that Registered is displayed for Google Cloud Print Checking from the Operator Panel 1 Press SETTING 2 Press to select Google Cloud Print and then press OK 3 Check that the following three items are displayed 1080 ...

Page 1082: ...ck the use status of the Cloud service from the Web page of this machine 1 Open a Web browser 2 Enter http The IP address of this machine in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine on Basic Operations 3 Click Administrator Login on the top screen Memo The factory default user name and password for Administra...

Page 1083: ...sable You cannot print Set this status if you want to suspend the use of Google Cloud Print or other cases Changing from the Web page Change the Use of Cloud Service settings from the Web page of this machine 1 Open a Web browser 2 Enter http The IP address of this machine in the in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information ...

Page 1084: ...lick Using Cloud Service 9 Change settings Changing from the Operator Panel 1 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 2 Press Google Cloud Print 3 Press Google Cloud Print Settings 4 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 5 Press Using Cloud Service 6 Select the type of settings 1083 ...

Page 1085: ...he Google Cloud Print administrator screen is also deleted at the same time The Google Cloud Print administrator screen https www google com cloudprint 2 Press Device Settings on the touch panel 3 Press Google Cloud Print 4 Press Delete Registered Information 5 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respective...

Page 1086: ...1085 ...

Page 1087: ...the Management Screen of Google Cloud Print 1 Access the Google Web site from a computer smartphone or other mobile device Google Web site https accounts google com 2 Enter the Google account information and then click Sign in 3 Click Print Check that the machine is not displayed Checking from the Web Page 1 Open a Web browser 2 Enter http The IP address of the machine in the in the address bar an...

Page 1088: ...rint administrator screen https www google com cloudprint In such a case delete the machine on the Google Cloud Print administrator screen If You Deleted the Information on the Google Cloud Print Administrator Screen If you deleted the registered machine on the Google Cloud Print administrator screen https www google com cloudprint the registration information remains in the machine In such a case...

Page 1089: ...1088 ...

Page 1090: ...es from the Web page of this machine http The IP address of this machine Specify the certificate that is issued by the certificate authority trusted by the proxy server You can import a PEM DER or PKCS 7 file Memo For details on your network contact your network administrator 1089 ...

Page 1091: ...Network Topics Software Web Page of This Machine Using Configuration Tool Printing by Using OKI LPR Utility Network Extension Using Network Card Setup Mac OS X 1090 ...

Page 1092: ...Network Settings Connecting to a Wireless LAN Only When the Wireless LAN Module is Mounted Connecting with a LAN Cable Initializing the Network Settings Setting the DHCP Server 1091 ...

Page 1093: ...cess points connections may be harder to be established The communication speed of a wireless LAN connection may be slower than that of a wired LAN or USB connection depending on the environment If you want to print big data such as a photo it is recommended to print with a wired LAN or USB connection Preparations to use a wireless LAN The machine can connect to a wireless LAN environment via wire...

Page 1094: ...want to use from the wireless LAN access points that the printer detects to establish a connection Setting from the Operator Panel Manually to Connect Set the wireless LAN access point information the SSID encryption method and encryption key manually to connect to the wireless LAN Checking That Connection is Established Correctly This section describes the procedure for checking by using the prin...

Page 1095: ...n a wireless LAN access point or other document 2 Check that the wireless LAN access point starts and is operating properly 3 Turn the machine on Memo If the following screen is displayed press Yes and then proceed to step 6 4 Press Device Settings 5 Press Wireless Setting 6 Enter the administrator name and password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaa...

Page 1096: ...S PBC 9 Press Yes The machine starts searching for wireless LAN access points The following screen is displayed for approximately 2 minutes during which press and hold the WPS button for the wireless LAN access point for a few seconds 1095 ...

Page 1097: ...te Memo If the following screen is displayed repeat the procedure from step 8 Overlap is displayed when multiple WPS push buttons are pressed almost at the same time at two or more wireless LAN access points and connection is not established Wait for a while and then try again Topics Checking That Connection is Established Correctly 1096 ...

Page 1098: ...elow 1 Check the SSID and encryption key by referring to the instruction manual that is included in a wireless LAN access point or other documents and write the information down Memo An SSID is also called a network name ESSID or ESS ID An encryption key is also called a network key security key password or Pre shared Key 2 Check that the wireless LAN access point starts and is operating properly ...

Page 1099: ...less LAN access point to connect and then press Select Note If only Manual Setup is displayed or the SSID of the wireless LAN access point you want to use is not included in the list set by following the procedure in Setting from the Operator Panel Manually to Connect The encryption key entry screen that is suitable for the encryption method of the selected wireless LAN access point is displayed 9...

Page 1100: ...WPA2 EAP Set from the Web page of this machine Open the Web Page of This Machine If neither of the above two cases is applied Item Description Security Disable Encryption key No entry is required 10 If the displayed SSID is the same as the SSID that you prepared in step 1 press Yes When the following screen is displayed the setting of the wireless LAN is complete If the following screen is display...

Page 1101: ...Topics Checking That Connection is Established Correctly 1100 ...

Page 1102: ...Note If the encryption method is WPA2 EAP set from the Web page of this machine For details open the Web page of this machine and click Admin Setup Network Wireless Setting Manual Setup Open the Web Page of This Machine Memo An SSID is also called a network name ESSID or ESS ID An encryption key is also called a network key security key password or Pre shared Key 2 Check that the wireless LAN acce...

Page 1103: ...sword are admin and aaaaaa respectively The following message is displayed for approximately 5 seconds 7 Press Wireless Network Selection The machine starts searching for wireless LAN access points Wait for a while A list of SSIDs of valid wireless LAN access points is displayed 8 Press Manual Setup 1102 ...

Page 1104: ...ption method that you selected in step 1 and then press Next Memo The encryption key varies depending on the wireless LAN access point or security 11 Select AES and then press Next 12 Enter the Pre shared Key and then press Next 13 If the displayed content is the same as that you prepared in step 1 press Yes 1103 ...

Page 1105: ...ss LAN is complete If the machine cannot detect the specified wireless LAN access point the following screen is displayed In such a case the specified wireless LAN access point may not be operating properly or the entered information the SSID encryption method and encryption key may be wrong Check Topics Checking That Connection is Established Correctly 1104 ...

Page 1106: ... connection is established correctly Memo The antenna mark may not be displayed on some screens such as the copy top screen If the wireless LAN connection is unstable If the wireless LAN connection is unstable read the cautions in Connecting This Machine to a Network in this manual and then change the positions of the machine and wireless LAN access point If you cannot find a solution even after r...

Page 1107: ...ss is set incorrectly the network may go down or Internet access may be disabled Memo If you construct a small network that consists of only the machine and a computer set IP addresses as shown below according to RFC1918 For the computer IP address 192 168 0 1 to 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Not used DNS server Not used For the machine IP address setting Manual IP address 192 168 ...

Page 1108: ...the LAN cable in a single loop at 2 to 3 cm from the end of the cable and then attach the core to the looped cable 4 Insert one end of the LAN cable into the network interface connector 5 Insert the other end of the LAN cable into the hub 6 Turn the machine on 1107 ...

Page 1109: ...1108 ...

Page 1110: ...nd password and press OK The factory default administrator name and password are admin and aaaaaa respectively 4 Press Network Menu 5 Press Network Setup 6 Press Factory Defaults 7 Press Yes Initializing from the Operator Panel of this Machine Boot Menu If you cannot initialize from the configuration menu of this machine you can initialize from the operator panel 1 Turn the machine on while pressi...

Page 1111: ...4 Press 1 on the 10 key pad 5 Press 1 on the 10 key pad 1110 ...

Page 1112: ...o step 8 2 Select Add Roles from Roles Summary 3 Click Next in Add Roles Wizard 4 Select the DHCP Server check box and then click Next 5 Set the settings by following the on screen instructions if necessary 6 Check the setting on the Confirm Installation Selection screen and then click Install 7 When the installation is complete click Close 8 Click Start and then select Administrative Tools DHCP t...

Page 1113: ...inish 13 Select the new scope from the DHCP list and then select Reservations 14 Select New Reservation from the Action menu 15 Set the settings 16 Click Add 17 Click Close 18 Select Exit from the File menu 1112 ...

Page 1114: ...Network Problems Unable to print from network Unable to Print Unable to save scanned images in a network folder Unable to Save Files in a Network Folder 1113 ...

Page 1115: ... of This Machine Adjusting Color with PS Gamma Adjuster Utility Using Configuration Tool About ActKey Printing by Using OKI LPR Utility Network Extension Using the Network Scanner Setup Tool Mac OS X Only Using Network Card Setup Mac OS X Print Job Accounting Client 1114 ...

Page 1116: ...1 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003 Using Configuration Tool PDF Print Direct Printing Prints out PDF files without launching any applications Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003...

Page 1117: ...nction Description System Requirements References PS Gamma Adjuster Print You can adjust the color density used for photographs Mac OS X 10 6 8 to 10 10 Adjusting Color with PS Gamma Adjuster Utility Color Correct Utility Print Adjust the Color Matching You can change the overall trend of output colors by adjusting the palette color output gamma value hue or saturation of the primary colors Using ...

Page 1118: ...1117 ...

Page 1119: ...omputer via a network or USB interface Note Check the status of this machine before installing This machine is turned on This machine is connected to a network with a network cable and the IP address or other settings are set USB connection is disabled by factory default You need to change the USB mode setting before connecting this machine to a computer with a USB cable Select Admin Setup Managem...

Page 1120: ...own list 4 Read the license agreement and then click Accept 5 Read Environmental advice for Users and click Next 6 Select Network Wired Wireless or USB corresponding to your connection environment and then click Next 7 Select the model name of this machine and then click Next 8 Click Custom Install 1119 ...

Page 1121: ...to install and click Install Install starts 12 When installation is complete click Close For Mac OS X You can copy a utility by dragging to any location You can also run a utility directly from the Software DVD ROM 1 Insert the included Software DVD ROM into a computer 2 From OKI double click the Utilities folder 3 Copy the folder of a utility to install by dragging to any location Memo To start u...

Page 1122: ...1121 ...

Page 1123: ...on with SSL TLS Encrypting Communication with IPSec Forwarding Received Document Data to an E mail Destination or Shared Folder Auto Delivery Limiting by Using an IP Address IP Filtering Limiting by Using a MAC Address MAC Address Filtering E mail Alert Checking the Status of This Machine by Using SNMPv3 Connecting This Machine to the Authentication Network by Using IEEE802 1X Setting the LDAP Ser...

Page 1124: ...s the following environment as an example Device name MC873 IP address of the machine 192 168 0 2 1 Start a Web browser 2 Enter http The IP address of this machine in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine Note If the IP address includes a value in one or two digits do not enter 0 before the value Communica...

Page 1125: ... Enter admin in User Name and the current password in Password and then click OK Memo The password is the same as the administrator password on the operator panel 3 Set the machine information that can be checked on a network click OK or SKIP Note To omit the setting click SKIP To not display from the next login select the Do not show this page again check 1124 ...

Page 1126: ...box and then click OK or SKIP 4 The following screen is displayed Note The following items are for developers and not available for general users Indexed Scanning sXP Application OutputManagement 1125 ...

Page 1127: ...administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Management New Admin Password 5 Enter a new password in New Password Memo You can enter 6 to 12 alphanumeric characters for the password The password is case sensitive 6 Re enter the new password in New Admin Password Verify The password is not be displayed Write down the password and keep it in a safe place 7 Click Submit The new settings take effect wh...

Page 1128: ...erating Environment Memo Check whether your browser is set as follows Set the security setting for the Web page to the middle level or enable Cookie To enter the Admin Setup menu the administrator password is required The factory default password is aaaaaa To change settings of the machine on the Web page you must log in as the administrator of the machine About how to set a network Connecting Thi...

Page 1129: ...00 002 Log In as the Administrator Note To change settings of this machine on the Web browser you must log in as this administrator of this machine 1 Start a Web browser 2 Enter http The IP address of this machine in the address bar and then press the Enter key About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine 3 Click Administrator Login 4 Enter admin in User Na...

Page 1130: ...ion that can be checked on a network click OK or SKIP Note To omit the setting click SKIP To not display from the next login select the Do not show this page again check box and then click OK or SKIP 6 The following screen is displayed Topics Change the administrator password in the following way Changing the Administrator Password 1129 ...

Page 1131: ...1130 ...

Page 1132: ...ertificate and a private key from the Web page Exporting a Certificate This section describes how to export a certificate Enabling Encryption Settings You must enable encryption after creating a certificate This section describes how to enable encryption by using the Web page Setting This Machine as the IPP Printer in a Windows Environment If you enable IPP print you can send print data to this ma...

Page 1133: ...tings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Network Security SSL TLS 5 Specify detailed settings by following the on screen instructions Memo The IP address of this machine is set to Common Name 6 Check the settings and then click OK In the case of a self signed certificate close the Web page by following the on screen instructions proceed to E...

Page 1134: ...1133 ...

Page 1135: ...e Checking or Changing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Click Admin Setup 4 Select Network Security SSL TLS 5 Select Using Certificate and Private Key after imported to import a certificate Memo You can import a certificate in PKCS 12 format 1134 ...

Page 1136: ...ate of this machine into the trusted certificate store of the computer to trust the certificate 1 Open the Web page of this machine How to log in to the Web page Checking or Changing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Click Admin Setup 4 Select Network Security SSL TLS 5 Select Export Certificate to export a certificate Memo You can export a certificate in...

Page 1137: ...ed immediately after the settings is changed from the Web page 1 Open the Web page of this machine How to log in to the Web page Checking or Changing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Network Security SSL TLS 5 Select Enable for the protocol to which apply the encryption 6 Click Submit 1136 ...

Page 1138: ...p The IP address of this machine ipp or http IP address of this machine ipp lp and then click Next 6 Click Have Disk 7 Insert the Software DVD ROM into the computer 8 Enter the following value in Copy manufacturer s files from and then click Use For PCL driver D Drivers _PCL For XPS driver D Drivers XPS For PS driver D Drivers PS Memo The above value is an example of the DVD ROM drive is set to th...

Page 1139: ...1138 ...

Page 1140: ...er and then install the driver Installing Software 2 Select System Preferences from the Apple menu 3 Click Print Scan 4 Click 5 Click the IP tab 6 Select IPP Internet Printing Protocol from Protocol 7 Enter the IP address of this machine in Address 8 Enter ipp lp in Queue 9 Click Add 10 Click Continue 11 Check that the machine is registered in Print Scan 1139 ...

Page 1141: ...t is rejected When you try to access a host that is not registered the attempt is invalid Be sure to configure the machine in advance before configuring your computer Memo You must have a pre shared key readied in advance Setting This Machine This section describes the settings you need to set on the printer to enable IPSec You must log in to the Web page as the administrator to complete this sett...

Page 1142: ...ing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Network Security IPSec 5 Specify detailed settings by following the on screen instructions Memo You must enable either AH or ESP in the Phase2 Proposal setting 6 Click Submit The new settings take effect when the network function of this machine restarts Note If you were unable to set up IP...

Page 1143: ... Panel System and Security Administrative Tools 2 Double click Local Security Policy 3 Click IP Security Policies on Local Computer in the Local Security Policy window 4 Select Create IP Security Policy from the Action menu 5 Click Next in IP Security Policy Wizard 6 Enter Name and Description and then click Next 7 Clear the Activate the default response rule earlier versions of Windows only check...

Page 1144: ...ecified in IKE Encryption Algorithm IKE Hush Algorithm and Diffie Hellman group in the Phase1 Proposal setting in Setting This Machine 7 Click OK 8 Select OK in the Key Exchange Security Methods window 9 Click OK in the Key Exchange Settings window Setting an IP Filter 1 Select the Rules tab in the IP security policy properties window 2 Click Add 3 Click Next in Security Rule Wizard 4 Select This ...

Page 1145: ...ion on the Filter Action Name screen 6 Select Negotiate security on the Filter Action General Options screen and then click Next 7 Select Do not allow unsecured communication on the Communicating with computers that do not support IPsec screen and then click Next 8 Select Custom on the IP Traffic Security screen and then click Settings 9 Set in the Custom Security Method Settings window and then c...

Page 1146: ...nd using IPsec check box 3 Click OK 4 Select the new filter action and then click Next 5 Select the authentication method on the Authentication Method screen and then click Next 6 Click Finish 7 Click OK in the New IP Security Policy Properties window 8 Select the new IP security policy in the Local Security Policy window 9 Select Assign from the Action menu 10 Check that Yes is displayed for Poli...

Page 1147: ...1146 ...

Page 1148: ...d faxes Internet Faxes and e mail attachment files The data is forwarded as a PDF or TIFF file depending on the file format of the received data You can register up to 100 sets of forwarding destinations for the auto delivery function 1 Open the Web page of this machine About the IP Address of this machine refer to Checking the Information of the Machine 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Select Tran...

Page 1149: ...6 Select ON for Automated Delivery 7 Select the check box of a required item for Search field 8 Select OFF for Print To print the received data select ON 1148 ...

Page 1150: ...9 Click Edit in Deliver To 10 Enter a destination e mail address and then click Add 11 Check that the entered address is displayed in Address List and then click OK 12 Click Edit in Deliver to 1149 ...

Page 1151: ...le List and then click OK 14 Click Submit Memo If Forwarding Setting is enabled received faxes are not automatically delivered with this function A received fax is delivered as a PDF file If a received e mail attachment file is not a PDF JPEG or TIFF file the file is not forwarded The body text of received e mails cannot be forwarded 1150 ...

Page 1152: ...that this function can handle is limited If the Memory card space of the machine is insufficient to save received faxes Internet Faxes or e mail attachment files the transmission data is not automatically delivered 1151 ...

Page 1153: ...age of this machine How to log in to the Web page Checking or Changing the Settings of This Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Network Security IP Filtering 5 Specify detailed settings by following the on screen instructions Note If nothing is registered in Administrator s IP Address to Register any access to the machine may not be allowed depending...

Page 1154: ...is Machine from a Computer 2 Log in as the administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Network Security MAC Address Filtering 5 Specify detailed settings by following the on screen instructions Note If nothing is registered in Administrator s MAC Address to Register access to the machine may not be allowed depending on the specified MAC address If you use a proxy server Your Current Local Host Pro...

Page 1155: ...on occurrence of an event in Way of E mail Alerting and then click To Step 2 8 Specify detailed settings by following the on screen instructions If you insert a check in any errors or warnings that require notification a window to specify the time difference between the sending of the notification and the occurrence of the error is displayed 9 Click OK 10 Click View a summary of current configurat...

Page 1156: ...ick Copy 7 Select Periodically in Way of E mail Alerting and then click To Step 2 8 Specify detailed settings by following the on screen instructions 9 Click OK 10 Click View a summary of current configuration to check the current settings and then click x to close the window You can check the current settings of up to two addresses in the main window Select the address you want to check from the ...

Page 1157: ...1156 ...

Page 1158: ... Log in as the administrator 3 Select Admin Setup 4 Select Network SNMP Settings 5 Specify detailed settings by following the on screen instructions 6 Click Submit The new settings take effect when the network function of this machine restarts Memo An SNMP agent is implemented You can confirm and change the machine settings with a commercially available SNMP agent For the MIB in the machine refer ...

Page 1159: ...on must be performed after computer connection is authenticated by enabling IEEE802 1X This section describes how to set PEAP which is an EAP authentication type You must log in as the administrator to complete this setting Setting by Using EAP TLS EAP authentication must be performed after computer connection is authenticated by enabling IEEE802 1X This section describes how to set EAP TLS which ...

Page 1160: ...ype 7 Enter a user name in EAP User 8 Enter a password in EAP Password 9 Select Authenticate Server and then click Import 10 Enter the file name of the CA certificate and then click OK Specify the certificate issued by the certificate authority that the RADIUS server obtained You can import a PEM DER and PKCS 7 file 11 Click Submit The new settings take effect when the network function of this mac...

Page 1161: ...1160 ...

Page 1162: ...te for EAP authentication and then click Import 9 Enter the file name of the certificate You can only import a PKCS 12 file 10 Enter the password of the certificate and then click OK 11 Select Authenticate Server and then click Import 12 Enter the file name of the CA certificate and then click OK Specify the certificate issued by the certificate authority that the RADIUS server obtained You can im...

Page 1163: ...authentication switch 17 Turn the machine on 18 Set up this machine 1162 ...

Page 1164: ...t number of the LDAP server in Port Number 7 Specify a value of time out to wait for the search results in Timeout 8 Specify the maximum number of the search result entries in Max Entries 9 Specify a BaseDN to access the LDAP server in Search Root 10 Enter attribute names to search as the user name in User Name Be sure to enter a value in Name 1 11 Enter an e mail address to search for in Mail Add...

Page 1165: ...oth the DNS server and secure protocol server 14 If you select other than Anonymous in step 13 specify the user ID and password to log in to the LDAP server 15 Select the encryption method in Encryption 16 Click Submit The new settings take effect when the network function of this machine restarts 1164 ...

Page 1166: ... in Password and then click OK For Mac OS X enter admin in Name and the administrator password of the machine in Password and then click Login 5 Click SKIP 6 Click Admin Setup at the top of the screen 7 Click Network Mail Server on the left side of the screen 8 Set the mail server based on the information on the setting information sheet if necessary 9 Click Submit 10 Click E mail Receive Settings...

Page 1167: ...web page of the machine Each user information has a role and once the access control is enabled users can only perform operations that are allowed to each role You can create groups and manage several users in a group Registering Users Registering Roles Registering Groups Setting the LDAP Authorization 1166 ...

Page 1168: ...thentication setting is required Kerberos Users Users registered to the Kerberos server Kerberos server authentication setting is required 6 Click 7 When the user information setting screen appears enter the required information User name Enter a user name Password Enter a password Display Name Enter a display name E mail address Enter your mail address Language Code Enter the language code PIN En...

Page 1169: ...e Web Page of This Machine 2 Log in as the administrator Log In as the Administrator 3 Click User Management 4 Click Role List 5 Click 6 When the Role information screen appears enter the required information Role Name Enter a role name Role Description Enter explanation for the role etc Permission Set to allow or forbid each operation or no authority to any operations If no authority is set opera...

Page 1170: ...1169 ...

Page 1171: ...3 Click User Management 4 Click Group List 5 Click 6 When the group information screen appears enter the required information Group Name Enter a group name Group Description Enter explanation for the group etc Local User List Add users to that group Kerberos User List Add Kerberos users to that group 7 Click Submit You can copy registered roles to add Press Copy on the right of the group name to d...

Page 1172: ...tion into the cash on the machine Memo Cache authentication information is a function which automatically switches to cash authentication when the machine cannot communicate with the LDAP server You can set an expiration date for the cache authentication information on a daily basis The expiration date means length of time that elapses since the last successful online authentication The elapsed ti...

Page 1173: ... lifetime of consumables Usage Report Displays the print statistics results Network You can check general information the status of TCP IP maintenance information and other Network setting information System Displays the machine information Paper Setup This function is displayed only if you log in as the administrator of the machine Item Description Tray Configuration You can set a paper size for ...

Page 1174: ...nation URL file name density document size color format monochrome format and other settings to a profile NetworkScan Registers deletes and edits a destination for a network scan Admin Setup This function is displayed only if you log in as the administrator of the machine Network Item Description General Network Settings Sets the general network settings Wireless Setting Sets the wireless settings...

Page 1175: ...erious problems that prevent you from accessing the machine via a network SSL TLS Encrypts communications between a computer client and the machine IPSec Sets the encryption for communications between a computer client and the machine and settings to prevent tampering Change Network Password Changes the administrator password The default value of the password is the last six digits of the MAC addr...

Page 1176: ...dge Level Sets Auto Color Judge Level Print From USB Memory Setup Set Print From USB Memory Print Setup Item Description Print Menu Print Setup Sets the number of copies resolution and other settings When using the printer driver the values that are set with the printer driver are given priority over these settings Printer Adjust Sets manual timeout jam recovery and other print adjustment settings...

Page 1177: ... Local Interface USB Menu Sets USB System Setup Sets access control display units and other settings Power Save Sets power save settings Memory Setup Sets the reception buffer size and resource save area Language Maint Setup Sets Language settings Admin Password Sets an administrator password Reset Settings Initializes all the data that is set in Management including speed dial copy and fax functi...

Page 1178: ...the function that enables you to automatically convert a received fax into an e mail and send it and the function that enables you to automatically deliver a received e mail Transmission Settings Sets the function that enables you to save received and sent faxes and e mail data to a server and other storages Automated Delivery Log Displays the automated delivery logs Display condition Admin Setup ...

Page 1179: ... the links that are set by the manufacturer and the links that are set by your administrator Edit Links Your administrator can set any URLs Five support links and five other links can be registered Include http in an entered URL 1178 ...

Page 1180: ...ecify dot gain compensation and halftone adjustment when printing or have the function that includes such settings in an EPS file To use such functions provided by the application uncheck Gamma Adjuster check box in the Color tab for the windows print driver or select None for Custom gamma in the Quality2 tab on the Print Options panel for the Mac OS X printer driver The Select Printer list of PS ...

Page 1181: ...e adjustment name 6 Change other settings if necessary and then click OK 7 Click Print on the Print screen For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver Registering an Adjusted Halftone 1 Start PS Gamma Adjuster 2 Click New 3 Adjust the halftone Edit the graph or enter the gamma value or the tone density in the text box to adjust the halftone 4 Enter a setting name in Gamma Curve Name and then click Save 5 Click...

Page 1182: ...splayed while the printer is being registered If a dialog box in which you can select a printer option is displayed while the printer is being registered click Cancel and then register the printer again Printing with a Registered Halftone 1 Open the file to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select the Print Options panel 4 Select the created halftone adjustment from Custom gamma in the Qua...

Page 1183: ...machine and how to delete the registered network scan information from this machine Cloning Settings This section describes how to clone various settings of this machine Setting the Alert Info Plug in This section describes how to display a message on a computer when a print job or another job is complete by using the Alert Info plug in Setting the Network Setting Plug in This section describes ho...

Page 1184: ...er Plug in How to install Configuration Tool Installing Software Registering This Machine If you install this machine for the first time register it in Configuration Tool 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select Register Device from the Tools menu Search results are displayed 3 Select this machine and then click Register 4 Click Yes on a con...

Page 1185: ...splayed Names and Functions of Screen Items for Configuration Tool This section describes the name and function of each screen Device Info tab The status and information of the machine are displayed Device Setting tab Set the device menu Item Description 1 Menu Settings Edit the setting of the menu 2 Cloning Copy device menu settings to another device 3 Change password Change device password 1184 ...

Page 1186: ...8 PIN Manager Set Edit device PIN and User 9 Automated Delivery Manager Set Edit device Automated Delivery Setup and Transmission Settings 10 Cloning Copy settings of each device Manager to another device Alert Info plug in Detect a device event and sends a notification Item Description 11 Basic settings Edit the basic Alert Info settings 12 Setting devices Edit the communications settings for eac...

Page 1187: ...Discover Devices Discovers network devices 16 Environment Settings Changes the device discovery criteria or communication options Storage Manager plug in Create or edit a file to download to a device Registration and deletion of form data Management of a stored job 1186 ...

Page 1188: ...se check boxes are selected and create a new document profile New PIN Registers a new PIN number New User Registers a new user LDAP server Specifies LDAP server for referring to the user related to the PIN Displays PIN as Standard Switches to the list display based on the PIN codes Displays User as Standard Switches to the list display based on the user names New Register a new automatic setting d...

Page 1189: ...to before changes Cancels the last change Display administrator settings Displays the administrator setting Backup settings Saves settings of the device displayed on the screen in a file Restore settings Restores the settings of the device that are stored in an external file Discover Devices Searches for the machine again Environment Settings Changes search conditions for this machine Device Setti...

Page 1190: ... project Deletes a file from a project Open a macro file filtering window Displays a filtering screen of the PCL form file Create download file Creates a download file Send download file to printer Sends a download file Send project file to printer Sends a project Send file s to printer Sends a file Open a job Management window Displays the job control screen Open an Administrator Functions window...

Page 1191: ...1190 ...

Page 1192: ...move a registered machine 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Right click the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select Remove device 4 Click Yes on a confirmation screen 1191 ...

Page 1193: ...ick Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the Device Info tab Memo If this machine is connected to the network Device Status is displayed To update information click Update Device Information 1192 ...

Page 1194: ...ine Before using the following functions install the Device Setting plug in How to install plug ins Installing Software About icons Starting Configuration Tool Saving Settings to a File 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the Device Setting tab 4 Click Menu settings 5 Click Backup settin...

Page 1195: ... 4 Click Menu settings 5 Click Restore settings 6 Check the content of the displayed message and then click Yes 7 Select the file to restore and then click Open 8 Click Save to device Setting a Password 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the Device Setting tab 4 Click Change password 11...

Page 1196: ...5 Enter the current password and a new password and then click OK 1195 ...

Page 1197: ...ng Software About profiles Profile About icons Starting Configuration Tool Exporting Profiles to a File 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine that has the profiles you want to export from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click Profile Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The facto...

Page 1198: ...ant to import the profiles from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click Profile Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Click Import from file 7 Select the file to import and then click Open 8 Select the settings to import and then click Import 9 Click Save to device 1197 ...

Page 1199: ... to install plug ins Installing Software About icons Starting Configuration Tool Exporting Network Scan Settings to a File 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine that has the network scan settings you want to export from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click Network Scan Manager 5 Enter the administrator...

Page 1200: ...file 7 Select the file to import and then click Open 8 Select the settings to import and then click Import 9 Click Save to device Deleting Network Scan Settings 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click Network Scan Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and th...

Page 1201: ...1200 ...

Page 1202: ...ng 5 Select a cloning destination and then click Execute 6 Enter the password for the cloning source and target and then click OK Cloning User Settings You can copy user settings to a different device 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine that has the settings you want to clone from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Se...

Page 1203: ...8 Enter the password for the cloning source and target and click OK Results are displayed 1202 ...

Page 1204: ...e following functions install the Alert Info plug in How to install plug ins Installing Software The Alert Info plug in can be used with devices connected to the network The time and time zone of this machine must be consistent with those of your computer Basic Settings You can set basic settings of the Alert Info plug in 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Config...

Page 1205: ...ams Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select Alert Info from the Plug ins menu 3 Select Setting devices 4 Click Update device 5 Select a device to set 6 Change the settings if necessary and then click OK Filter Settings You can set display alert conditions for sending and receiving faxes printing the document or receiving e mails and Internet faxes 1204 ...

Page 1206: ...ng if necessary 5 Click OK Memo Up to 300 senders can be registered as e mail Internet fax or fax sender Checking Logs Using the event log you can check whether there are any records about the machine that is registered 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select Alert Info from the Plug ins menu 3 Select Display log 1205 ...

Page 1207: ...Memo You can check the total number of recorded events in Log Number List You can check details of recorded logs in Log details 1206 ...

Page 1208: ... Starting Configuration Tool Searching for the Machine on a Network You can search for this machine 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select Network Setting from the Plug ins menu 3 Select Discover Devices Search results are displayed Specifying Search Conditions 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configura...

Page 1209: ...lick Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select Network Setting from the Plug ins menu 3 Select Discover Devices 4 Select the machine from the device list 5 Click Device Settings 6 Change the setting if necessary 7 Click OK 1208 ...

Page 1210: ...8 Enter the network password and then click OK The default password is the last six alphanumerical digits of the MAC address 9 Click OK to restart this machine 1209 ...

Page 1211: ...driver cannot be used Creating a Form 1 Click Start and then select Devices and Printers 2 Right click the printer icon and then select the necessary printer driver from Printer Properties 3 Select the Ports tab select the FILE check box from Port and then click Configure Port 4 Create a form to register on the machine If using the Windows PCL printer driver proceed to step 9 5 Select Print from t...

Page 1212: ...Manager from the Plug ins menu 3 Click New Project 4 Click Add File to Project and then select a created form file The form is added to the project 5 Click the form file 6 Enter ID and then click OK Note Do not change Target Volume and Path 7 Select the machine from the bottom of the Storage Manager Plug in window 8 Click Send project file to printer 9 Click OK 1211 ...

Page 1213: ...alling Software 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select Storage Manager from the Plug ins menu 3 Click the device name in the device selection area at the bottom of the Storage Manager plug in screen The storage volume name size free space location name label status file name size and comment are displayed by communicating with the device 1...

Page 1214: ...Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select Storage Manager from the Plug ins menu 3 Click Open a job Management window 4 To view a specific user s print jobs enter the password and then click Apply job password Memo To view all the print jobs enter the administrator password and then click Apply administrator password The factory default adminis...

Page 1215: ...nctions such as role based access control Creating a new PIN 1 Click Start and then select All programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click PIN Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Click New PIN 7 Enter the PIN number you want to use 8 S...

Page 1216: ...iguration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click PIN Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Select the check box of the PIN you want to delete 7 Click Delete 8 Click Yes on a confirmation screen 9 Click Save to device Exporting a PIN to a File 1 Click Start and th...

Page 1217: ...ng a PIN from a File 1 Click Start and then select All programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine to which you want to import the PIN from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click PIN Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Click Import from file 7 Select the file to import and then ...

Page 1218: ...1217 ...

Page 1219: ...ss control Creating a New User 1 Click Start and then select All programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click PIN Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Click New User 7 Enter the user name and password Memo You cannot use admin as a new u...

Page 1220: ...er name to change 7 Change settings if necessary and then click OK 8 Click Save to device Deleting a User 1 Click Start and then select All programs Okidata Configuration Tool Configuration Tool 2 Select the machine from Registered Device Table 3 Select the User Setting tab 4 Click PIN Manager 5 Enter the administrator password and then click OK The factory default password is aaaaaa 6 Select the ...

Page 1221: ...1220 ...

Page 1222: ... scanning according to the specified settings just by clicking a button Memo ActKey does not support Mac OS X When you install ActKey Network Configuration is also installed at the same time Before Using Remote Scan Using ActKey Windows 1221 ...

Page 1223: ...Port Number Uninstalling OKI LPR Utility Uninstall Sending a File to a Printer That is Registered in OKI LPR Utility Deleting an Unnecessary Print Job You can perform a print job via a network manage print jobs and check the machine status by using OKI LPR Utility To use OKI LPR Utility TCP IP must be enabled Note OKI LPR Utility cannot be used for shared printers Use the standard TCP IP port How ...

Page 1224: ...d follow the procedure described in If you cannot add a printer above 3 Select Printer Name and then enter the IP address Network printers and printers connected to the LPR port are not displayed 4 When selecting a network printer select Discover 5 Click OK Adding a Comment to a Registered Printer You can add a comment to identify the printer that you have added to OKI LPR Utility 1 Start OKI LPR ...

Page 1225: ...he destination printer Forwarding Print Jobs Automatically If you are unable to print because the selected printer is busy offline out of paper or due to other reasons you can set so that a print job can be automatically forwarded to another OKI model printer Note Print jobs can only be forwarded to the same OKI model printer as the one you are using Before forwarding a job you must add another sa...

Page 1226: ...s 5 Select the Print to more than one printer at a time check box 6 Click Options 7 Click Add 8 Enter the IP address of the printer from which you want to print at the same time and then click OK 9 Click OK Opening the Web Page of the Registered Printer You can open the Web page of this machine from OKI LPR Utility 1 Start OKI LPR Utility 2 Select a printer 3 Select Web Setting from the Remote Pri...

Page 1227: ...onnect check box and then click OK Setting the OKI LPR Utility Port Number 1 Select a printer 2 Select Confirm Connections from the Remote Print menu 3 Click Details 4 Enter the port number in Port Numbers 5 Click OK Uninstalling OKI LPR Utility Uninstall Note You must have the administrator rights 1 Check that OKI LPR Utility is closed 2 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata OKI LPR Ut...

Page 1228: ...a is downloaded 3 Select Download from Remote Print 4 Select a file and then click OK The file is sent to the printer Deleting an Unnecessary Print Job You can use OKI LPR Utility to delete unnecessary print jobs 1 Click Start on a computer and then select All Programs Okidata OKI LPR Utility OKI LPR Utility 2 Select Job Status from the Remote Print menu 3 Select a job to delete 4 Select Delete Jo...

Page 1229: ...1228 ...

Page 1230: ...etwork Extension TCP IP needs to be activated Note This requires administrator rights Memo Network Extension is automatically installed when installing a printer driver through a TCP IP network Network Extension works in conjunction with the printer driver Do not install only Network Extension Network Extension only functions when the printer driver is connected to OKI LPR port or the standard TCP...

Page 1231: ...an change settings of this machine on this webpage screen Web Page of This Machine Memo The Option tab may not be displayed properly when using Network Extension in unsupported environments Set Options Automatically You can get the composition of options of the connected machine and automatically set the printer driver 1 Start the printer properties screen About Screens and Functions of Each Print...

Page 1232: ...Click Start and then select Control Panel Programs Uninstall a program 2 Select OKI Network Extension and then click Uninstall 3 Follow the instructions on the screen and complete the uninstallation 1231 ...

Page 1233: ...Using the Network Scanner Setup Tool Mac OS X Only This section describes about the Network Scanner Setup Tool which is a tool for setting the connection destination Before Using WSD Scan 1232 ...

Page 1234: ... from the list 3 Select IP Address Settings from the Operations menu 4 Change other settings if necessary and then click Save 5 Enter the password and then click OK The default password is the last six alphanumerical digits of the MAC address The password is case sensitive 6 Click OK to enable new settings The network card of this machine restarts Configuring Web Settings You can set the network s...

Page 1235: ...rd is the last six alphanumerical digits of the MAC address The password is case sensitive 6 Click OK in a confirmation window Opening the Web page 1 Starts Network Card Setup Installing Software 2 Select this machine from the list 3 Select Show Device Webpage from the Operations menu The Web page opens and the machine status page is displayed Quitting Network Card Setup 1 Select Quit from the Net...

Page 1236: ... if you are using the function that enables you to set the same mode to all the printer drivers you do not need to set the mode again Setting the User Name and Job Account ID You can set the user name and Job Account ID in the printer driver properties 1 Click Start and then select All Programs Okidata Print Job Accounting Client Change Job Accounting Mode 2 Select the driver to set from the list ...

Page 1237: ... manager can create and register an ID file in which job account IDs and user names that are tied to user names for logging in to Windows are described in advance Users do not need to enter their user names and job account IDs when printing as they can be identified with this software Use Hide Mode for shared printers 1 Create an ID file using Notepad or spreadsheet software Memo Describe user nam...

Page 1238: ...on is not output 5 Select Hide and then click Change 6 Click OK 7 Select Import ID File from the Hide Mode menu 8 Specify the ID file you created in step 1 and then click Open 9 Clear the Set fixed Job Account ID for all users check box from the Hide Mode menu 10 Select Close from the File menu Setting in the Mac OS X Environment This is client software for Print Job Accounting You can set the use...

Page 1239: ...V format 4 Start the Print Job Accounting client 5 Select Import from the File menu 6 Select the CSV file you created in step 3 and then click Open 7 Click Save 8 Enter the password and then click OK 9 Exit the Print Job Accounting client Changing a User ID and User Name You can change the user name and user ID 1 Start the Print Job Accounting client 2 Select the user to change and then click Edit...

Page 1240: ...te the username and user ID 1 Start the Print Job Accounting client 2 Select the user to delete and then click Delete 3 Click Save 4 Enter the password and then click OK 5 Exit the Print Job Accounting client 1239 ...

Page 1241: ...nting Data in USB Memory Create Your Own Banners Printing on Long Paper Create Your Own Event Posters Dividing a Document to Print on Some Sheets for Making a Poster Create Your Own Saddle bound Booklets Making a Booklet Send Paperless Faxes from Your Computer Sending a PC Fax Preview Incoming Faxes via E mail Scan Bulky Documents to Reduce Clutter Make It More Convenient 1240 ...

Page 1242: ...Saving Sent and Received Data Transmission Data Save Sending Scanned Data to a Computer Scanning from a Computer Change the Settings Remotely Starting Configuration Tool Open the Web Page of This Machine Customize the Touch Panel to Suit Your Preferences How to Customize the Touch Panel 1241 ...

Page 1243: ...1242 ...

Page 1244: ... is too much trouble we recommend using the Stored Job function to store each document as a Print Job on the machine With this function you can store your frequently used standardized documents in the machine s Memory and print them directly from the Operator Panel whenever you need them This ability to print without having to start up your computer can help you save precious time Storing Frequent...

Page 1245: ... using the Printing Data in USB Memory function which enables you to print documents without using a computer You can print files stored in USB Memory without using a printer driver Simply insert USB Memory that contains the data that you want to print into the machine s USB port and use the Operator Panel to perform printing Printing Data in USB Memory Example of Other Convenient Usage Printing t...

Page 1246: ...wanted to use one but hesitated because of the trouble of having to order it or because of the cost In this case we recommend using the Printing on Long Paper function which enables you to print on elongated paper With an OKI Data printer you can design a banner on your computer and then print the data whenever and however many times you need it You can also use this function to print large as lif...

Page 1247: ...s case we recommend using the Poster Print function The function works by dividing a poster into several parts and printing the enlarged portions on multiple sheets of paper By gluing the separately printed sheets together you can create a rather large poster Dividing a Document to Print on Some Sheets for Making a Poster Example of Other Convenient Usage Printing Event Notification Poster for Nur...

Page 1248: ...o create a booklet In this case we recommend using the Booklet Print function With this function you can arrange the pages into the appropriate order for printing You can then use a commercially available booklet stapler to create a true saddle bound booklet Making a Booklet Example of Other Convenient Usage Printing of Product Catalogue Memo When you want to put a different types of the cover Pri...

Page 1249: ...d it In this case we recommend using the PC Fax function which enables you to send faxes directly from your computer With this function files on your computer are faxed directly to the recipient eliminating the need to print them out first In addition to saving time and money you can also keep your peace of mind by saving the data on your computer Sending a PC Fax It is troublesome to transmit aft...

Page 1250: ...omputer and receive them as e mail attachments With the ability to check the contents of faxes on your computer screen you can simply delete the ones that are not important without printing them out We also recommend using the Transmission Data Save function in combination with Auto Delivery This function enables you to save a record of all incoming and outgoing messages on the server which you ca...

Page 1251: ... computer With the Remote Scan function you can operate the machine via your computer and select the location to store the scanned data By scanning documents and saving them to your computer you can reduce the risk of misplacing damaging or losing them while making it easier to retrieve them At the same time you can reduce the clutter around your desk enabling you to work more efficiently The Remo...

Page 1252: ...nsuming process to change the settings on each and every machine In this case we recommend using the Configuration Tool or Web page function Configuration Tool is an application that runs on your computer If you do not have the application or if you are using a mobile device the Web page function is useful These functions enable you to change and manage the settings from a remote location without ...

Page 1253: ...ave to start over Have you ever wished you could quickly select the functions that you frequently use In this case the Shortcut function is convenient With this function you can eliminate the stress of having to select the functions each time by moving deeply nested functions as well as functions from different tabs up to the top screen By customizing the touch panel you can work more efficiently ...

Page 1254: ... in the United States and other countries Other product names and brand names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their proprietors As an Energy Star Program Participant the manufacturer has determined that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency This product complies with the requirements of the Council Directives 2004 108 EC EMC 2006 95 EC LVD 1999 5 EC R TTE 2...

Page 1255: ... keeping eyelids open Seek medical attention Spillages should be treated with cold water and soap to help reduce risk of staining skin or clothing MANUFACTURER Oki Data Corporation 4 11 22 Shibaura Minato ku Tokyo 108 8551 Japan For all sales support and general enquiries contact your local distributor IMPORTER TO THE EU AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE OKI Europe Limited Blays House Wick Road Egham Surr...

Page 1256: ...1255 ...

Page 1257: ...1256 ...

Page 1258: ...CULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGEN...

Page 1259: ...oftware to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the ...

Page 1260: ...1259 ...

Page 1261: ...Ireland Tel 44 0 7767 271447 Fax 44 0 1 404 9520 http www oki ie Technical Support for all Ireland Tel 353 1 4049570 Fax 353 1 4049555 E mail tech support oki ie OKI Systems Czech and Slovak s r o IBC Pobřežní 3 186 00 Praha 8 Czech Republic Tel 420 224 890158 Fax 420 22 232 6621 Website www oki cz www oki sk Oki Systems Deutschland GmbH Hansaallee 187 40549 Düsseldorf Tel 01805 6544357 01805 OKIH...

Page 1262: ...09 Website www okihu hu OKI Systems Italia S p A via Milano 11 20084 Lacchiarella MI Tel 39 0 2 900261 Fax 39 0 2 90026344 Website www oki it OKI Systems Polska Platinium Business Park II 3rd Floor ul Domaniewska 42 02 672 Warsaw Poland Tel 48 22 448 65 00 Fax 48 22 448 65 01 Website www oki com pl E mail oki oki com pl Hotline 0800 120066 E mail tech oki com pl Oki Systems Ibérica S A Sucursal Po...

Page 1263: ...0 2236 677110 501 Fax Support 43 0 2236 677110 502 Website www oki at OKI Europe Ltd Ukraine Raisy Opkinoy Street 8 Building B 2nd Floor Kiev 02002 Ukraine Tel 380 44 537 5288 e mail info oki ua Website www oki ua OKI Sistem ve Yazıcı Çözümleri Tic Ltd Şti Harman sok Duran Is Merkezi No 4 Kat 6 34394 Levent İstanbul Tel 90 212 279 2393 Faks 90 212 279 2366 Web www oki com tr www okiprintingsolutio...

Page 1264: ...Website www oki nl Oki Systems Norway AS Tevlingveien 23 N 1081 Oslo Tel 47 0 63 89 36 00 Telefax 47 0 63 89 36 01 Ordrefax 47 0 63 89 36 02 Website www oki no General Systems S R L Romania Sos Bucuresti Ploiesti Nr 135 Bucharest 1 Romania Tel 40 21 303 3138 Fax 40 21303 3150 Website http romania oki com Var vänlig kontakta din Återförsäljare i första hand för konsultation I andra hand kontakta Ok...

Page 1265: ...a OTRO 2000 Bishops Gate Blvd Mt Laurel NJ 08054 USA Tel Español 1 856 222 7496 1 856 222 5276 Fax 1 856 222 5260 Email LASatisfaction okidata com Oki Data de Mexico S A de C V Mariano Escobedo 748 Piso 8 Col Nueva Anzures C P 11590 México D F Tel 52 555 263 8780 Fax 52 555 250 3501 http WWW OKIPRINTINGSOLUTIONS COM Oki Data do Brasil Informática Ltda Av Alfredo Egídio de Souza Aranha 100 5º Andar...

Page 1266: ... IV Road Tungmahamek Sathorn Bangkok 10120 Tel 662 679 9235 Fax 662 679 9243 245 http www okisysthai com Oki Data Australia Pty Ltd Level1 67 Epping Road Macquarie Park NSW 2113 Australia Tel 61 2 8071 0000 Support Tel 1800 807 472 Fax 61 2 8071 0010 http www oki com au Comworth Systems Ltd 8 Antares Place Rosedale Auckland 0632 New Zealand Tel 64 9 477 0500 Fax 64 9 477 0549 http www comworth co ...

Page 1267: ......

Search results

Summary of Contents for ES8453 MFP

Reviews:

Related manuals for ES8453 MFP

Brands by name

Popular brands

Oki ES8453 MFP, User Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for ES8453 MFP

Reviews:

Related manuals for ES8453 MFP

Brands by name

Popular brands